SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Avalo AC Medication Carts
by ARTROMICK




System3
    User’s Manual
    Host Software Manual




                           Artromick International, Inc.
                           4800 Hilton Corporate Drive
                           Columbus OH 43232
Notice
January 2004

© Copyright 2004
ARTROMICK International, Inc.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Published 2004.
Printed in the United States of America


WARNING: ANY UNAUTHORIZED DUPLICATION OF THIS DOCUMENTATION
SHALL BE AN INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT.
Trade Secret Notice
This documentation, the software it describes, and the information and know-how they con-
tain constitute the proprietary, confidential and valuable trade secret information of Artro-
mick International, Inc., its affiliated companies or its or their licensors, and may not be used
for any unauthorized purpose, or disclosed to others without the prior written permission of
the applicable Artromick International entity.

This documentation and the software which it describes are licensed either “AS IS” or with a
limited warranty, as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Other than any limited
warranties provided, NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED AND NONE SHALL BE
IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
USE OR FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The applicable Artromick International entity
reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and to make changes in the
content hereof without the obligation to notify any person or entity of such revisions or
changes.

Product names mentioned herein may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their
respective companies. Artromick and Avalo are registered trademarks of Artromick Interna-
tional, Inc.




                                          Artromick International, Inc.
                                          4800 Hilton Corporate Drive
                                          Columbus OH 43232


                                          phone: 800.848.6462
                                          fax: 888.864.9937
                                          www.artromick.com
i




Table of Contents                                     0


Chapter 1      Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
                                         Contents .................................................................. 1
                        About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
                                   Introduction.............................................................. 2
                                   Documentation Conventions ................................... 3
                        Cart Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
                                   Cart Features/Components ..................................... 4
                                   Keypad Buttons and Functions ............................... 5
                                   Connector Panel Parts and Functions..................... 7
                                   Cart User Types and Responsibilities ..................... 8
                                   Override Rights ....................................................... 8
                                   Terms and Definitions ............................................. 9
                                   Pre-Configured Settings ........................................ 11

Chapter 2      Using the Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
                                         Contents ................................................................ 13
                        Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
                                  Introduction............................................................ 14
                        Accessing the Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
                                  Introduction............................................................ 15
                                  Accessing with Access Code Only ........................ 16
                                  Accessing with Access Card Only......................... 17
                                  Accessing with Code and Access Card................. 18
                                  Accessing Using a Key.......................................... 19
                                  Problems Accessing the Cart ................................ 19
                        Testing and Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
                                   Introduction............................................................ 22
                                   Testing the battery................................................. 22
                                   Charging the Battery ............................................. 23
                        Securing the Avalo AC Medication Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
                                   Introduction............................................................ 24
                                   Securing the Cart with the Keypad........................ 24
                                   Securing the Cart Manually ................................... 25
                        Using the AutoLock Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
                                   Introduction............................................................ 26
                                   AutoLock Activity ................................................... 26
                                   Relock Process ..................................................... 27
                        Using eNarc Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
                                  Introduction............................................................ 28

January 2004
ii




                                   Automatic
                                   Re-Lock ................................................................. 28
                                   Alarms and Messages........................................... 28
                                   eNarc Access Procedure....................................... 29
                  Using the Override Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
                             Introduction............................................................ 30
                             Procedure.............................................................. 30
                  Using the Night Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
                             Turning the light on or off from the keypad............ 32
                             Setting an adjustable timer.................................... 32
                  Opening the Rear Access Panel Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
                            Introduction............................................................ 33
                            Procedure.............................................................. 33

Chapter 3   Programming the Cart Using the Host Software . . . . . . . 35
                                   Contents ................................................................ 35
                  Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
                            Introduction............................................................ 38
                            System Requirements ........................................... 38
                            Event, User, and Cart Setting Files ....................... 39
                            Read Cart and Write Cart Functionality................. 39
                            Arranging
                            Open Files ............................................................. 39
                  Installing the Host Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
                               Procedure.............................................................. 40
                  Accessing the Host Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
                            Procedure.............................................................. 42
                  Connecting the Host Software to the Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
                            Introduction............................................................ 43
                            Connection Stages ................................................ 43
                            Preparing Your Cart .............................................. 44
                            Connecting Your PC or Laptop to the Cart............ 46
                            Configuring COM Port Settings ............................. 47
                  Closing the Host Software Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
                             Introduction............................................................ 49
                             Closing the Host Software Connection
                             Using the Cart ....................................................... 49
                             Closing the Host Software Connection
                             Using the Software ................................................ 50
                  Recalling Events Using Host Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
                             Introduction............................................................ 51
                             Event Master List................................................... 51
                             Events Log File Defined ........................................ 51


                                                                                                          January 2004
iii




                               Creating an Events Log File ..................................           53
                               Accessing the Events Log File ..............................             54
                               Updating an Events Log File .................................            54
                               Sorting Events .......................................................   55
               Managing Cart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
                         Introduction............................................................ 56
                         Managing User Access Codes .............................. 56
               Creating a Cart Settings File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
                          Introduction............................................................ 58
                          Cart Settings File Defined ..................................... 58
                          Procedure.............................................................. 64
               Accessing Cart Settings File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
                         Procedure.............................................................. 66
               Reading Cart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
                         Introduction............................................................ 67
                         Procedure.............................................................. 67
               Writing Cart Settings to the Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
                          Introduction............................................................ 68
                          Procedure.............................................................. 68
               Modifying a Cart Settings File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
                          Introduction............................................................ 69
                          Procedure.............................................................. 70
               Managing Cart Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
                         Introduction............................................................ 71
                         Managing General User Access............................ 71
                         Managing Specific User Access............................ 72
                         Managing Users on Multiple Carts ........................ 72
               Creating a User File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
                          Introduction............................................................ 73
                          User File Defined................................................... 73
                          Procedure.............................................................. 78
               Accessing a User File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
                         Procedure.............................................................. 79
               Reading User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
                         Introduction............................................................ 80
                         Procedure.............................................................. 80
               Writing Users to the Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
                          Introduction............................................................ 81
                          Procedure.............................................................. 81
               Adding a Group of Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
                         Introduction............................................................ 82
                         Add Group Dialog Box Settings Defined ............... 82
                         Procedure.............................................................. 84

January 2004
iv




                   Adding a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
                             Introduction............................................................ 85
                             Add User Dialog Box Settings Defined.................. 85
                             Procedure.............................................................. 87
                   Modifying a User Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
                              Introduction............................................................ 89
                              Modifying A User’s Access Settings...................... 89
                              Modifying a User’s eNarc Access Code Settings .. 91
                   Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
                               Introduction............................................................ 93
                               Procedure.............................................................. 93

Chapter 4   Programming the Cart From the Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
                                    Contents ................................................................ 95
                   Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
                             Introduction............................................................ 96
                   Entering Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
                              Introduction............................................................ 97
                              Procedure.............................................................. 97
                   Recalling Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
                              Introduction............................................................ 99
                              General Navigation................................................ 99
                              Event Master List................................................... 99
                              Procedure............................................................ 100
                   Managing Cart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
                             Introduction.......................................................... 101
                             Managing Access Codes..................................... 101
                             General Navigation.............................................. 102
                   Modifying Cart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
                              Introduction.......................................................... 103
                              Cart Settings Defined .......................................... 103
                              Procedure............................................................ 108
                   Managing Cart Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
                             Introduction.......................................................... 119
                             Managing GENERAL User Access ..................... 119
                             Managing SPECIFIC User Access...................... 120
                             General Navigation.............................................. 120
                   Adding a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
                             Introduction.......................................................... 121
                             User Access Settings Defined............................. 122
                             Procedure............................................................ 124
                   Modifying User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
                              Introduction.......................................................... 127


                                                                                                           January 2004
v




                                        Modifying A User’s Code Access Settings .......... 127
                                        Modifying a User’s eNarc Access Code Settings 129
                        Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
                                    Introduction.......................................................... 131
                                    Procedure............................................................ 131

Appendix A     Event Master List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
                                        Event Codes........................................................ 133

Appendix B     Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
                                        General Tips........................................................ 137
                                        Restarting Your Cart............................................ 137

Appendix C     Setup Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
                                        Cart Settings........................................................ 139
                                        Default User Sheet .............................................. 141




January 2004
vi




     January 2004
-1
                                                                                                                       1



                                                                                                                    1
                                                                                      Overview
          Contents   About This Guide ............................................................................... 2
                                Introduction ....................................................................... 2
                                Documentation Conventions............................................. 3
                     Cart Overview ..................................................................................... 4
                                Cart Features/Components .............................................. 4
                                Keypad Buttons and Functions......................................... 5
                                Connector Panel Parts and Functions .............................. 7
                                Cart User Types and Responsibilities............................... 8
                                Override Rights................................................................. 8
                                Terms and Definitions....................................................... 9
                                Pre-Configured Settings ................................................... 11




January 2004
2                              About This Guide                                                 Overview




About This Guide


     Introduction   Your Artromick® Avalo AC Medication Cart features state-of-the-art engineering
                    that combines a flexible design with easy-to-use access and security features.
                    This guide describes how to program and use the cart.

                    This guide is divided into the following chapters/appendices:
                        Overview: This chapter applies to all users. It contains overview information
                        about the cart, its features, and the roles and responsibilities of its users. It
                        also describes type conventions used throughout the document and terms
                        you must understand to interact with the cart.
                        Using the Cart: This chapter applies to all users. The chapter describes
                        various access methods, how to test the cart’s battery, how to secure the cart,
                        and how to use the Override Code to restock the cart. This chapter also
                        describes how to use some of the cart’s optional features.
                        Programming the Cart Using the Host Software: This chapter applies to
                        cart administrators. The chapter describes how to use the Avalo Advantage
                        Cart Host software to recall events; to add, delete, and edit user access
                        profiles; and to edit the cart’s settings.
                        Programming the Cart From the Cart: This chapter applies to cart
                        administrators. The chapter describes how to use the cart to recall events; to
                        add, delete, and edit user access profiles; and to edit the cart’s settings.
                        Appendix A: Event Master List: This appendix applies to cart
                        administrators. The appendix provides a detailed description of event-related
                        codes that display on the cart’s liquid crystal display (LCD) or in the Cart Host
                        software with regard to the cart’s audit tracking system.
                        Appendix B: Troubleshooting: This appendix applies to users who perform
                        troubleshooting functions. The appendix provides tips on how to troubleshoot
                        basic cart issues.
                        Appendix C: Setup Guides: This appendix applies to cart administrators.
                        The appendix provides a list of cart and user settings, the default value for the
                        setting, setting options, and whether the setting can be changed using the
                        cart’s keypad.

                                                                                    (Continued on next page)




                                                                                               January 2004
Overview                                                          About This Guide                 3




  Documentation   This document uses different type styles to indicate elements of the cart. The
    Conventions   following table describes the conventions.

                             Convention                              Description

                   BOLD FACE                        Indicates a message that displays in the cart’s
                   UPPERCASE LETTERS                LCD.

                   Bold face type                   Bold type indicates:
                                                         A selection that you are instructed to
                                                         make or clear by pressing the appropriate
                                                         number or button on the cart’s key pad
                                                         A selection that you are instructed to
                                                         make or clear when you are working with
                                                         the Cart Host software

                   Italics                          Used for emphasis or to cross reference
                                                    topics that contain additional information.




January 2004
4                            Cart Overview                                                     Overview




Cart Overview


 Cart Features/   The Avalo AC Medication Cart is equipped with standard and optional features.
  Components
                  Standard features include:
                      AutoLock™ Timer: The AutoLock timer monitors cart activity and is
                      programmed to automatically secure the cart whenever the cart remains
                      motionless for a preconfigured relock time interval of 1 to 99 minutes.
                      Easy-to-Edit Settings and Controls: The cart’s display screen near the
                      keypad shows messages, date and time settings, and easy-to-follow user
                      instructions.
                      Event Recall Functionality: Authorized users can track cart activity,
                      including user access and relocking procedures.
                      Flexible Access Methods: Depending on your security needs, users access
                      the cart using an access code, an access card, an access code and an
                      access card, or a key.
                      Multiple User Access Roles: Users are assigned access based on job
                      function. Users with “Admin” access can program and use the cart; users with
                      “Normal” or “Key User” access can use the cart, but cannot program it.
                      Override Code Functionality: The Override Code is assigned to the cart and
                      provides authorized users with a special means of access that bypasses
                      alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms. This function is typically used
                      while the cart is being restocked in the pharmacy.
                      Rechargable Battery: The rechargable, valve-regulated lead acid battery
                      typically supplies the cart with continuous power for approximately five days
                      or 1,000 lock/relock cycles.
                      Reset Button: The Reset button enables you to restart the cart by resetting it,
                      in the event that the cart is not functioning properly.

                  Optional features include:
                      Card Access Options: The card reader accessory provides primary or
                      secondary levels of access.
                      Cart Host Software: The Avalo Advantage Cart Host software package that
                      enables authorized users to easily program the cart and to retrieve event,
                      user profile, and cart settings.
                      eNarc™: Electronic Keyless Narcotic Storage (eNarc) provides code-based
                      access to secured narcotic drawers.
                      Night Light: The night light illuminates the cart’s work area to increase
                      visibility. The amount of time that the light stays on after the cart is secure is
                      adjustable.


                                                                                              January 2004
Overview                                                              Cart Overview                 5




 Keypad Buttons   This section describes the parts and functions of the Avalo AC Medication Cart
  and Functions   keypad. The following diagram illustrates the keypad.




                             Button Name                              Function

                   Function/ESC                    This button is recommended for administrator
                                                   use only. It serves two purposes:
                                                       Function: Enables an administrator to
                                                       enter Programming mode, from which he
                                                       or she can program the cart or use the
                                                       cart’s audit tracking feature. This button
                                                       also enables a user with override rights to
                                                       enter Override mode.
                                                       ESC: Once an administrator is in
                                                       Programming mode, he or she can use
                                                       ESC to exit out of lists and subgroups.

                   Battery                         This button enables users to test the amount of
                                                   charge left in the cart’s battery.

                   Light                           This button turns the optional night light on or
                                                   off.

                   Secure                          This button secures the cart.

                           (eNarc)                 Initiates access to the optional Electronic
                                                   Keyless Narcotic Storage (eNarc) drawer(s).
                                                                             (Continued on next page)




January 2004
6            Cart Overview                                           Overview




              (Contd)
            Button Name                        Function

    Clear                    This button works like a backspace key on a
                             computer keyboard. This button also resets the
                             AutoLock timer.

    Numbered Keypad          The numbered keypad enables you to enter
                             access codes and to accept or change cart
                             settings.

                             Numbers also enable you to scroll when you
                             are working in Recall Events mode:
                                 Use 5 and 8 on the keypad to scroll
                                 forward or backward, respectively, through
                                 the events in the subgroup one event at a
                                 time.
                                 Use 2 and 0 on the keypad to scroll
                                 forward or backward through five events at
                                 a time.



                                                        (Continued on next page)




                                                                   January 2004
Overview                                                             Cart Overview                 7




Connector Panel   This section describes the parts and functions of the connector panel (AC
      Parts and   Systems Support Panel) located at the rear of the cart. The diagram in the table
     Functions    illustrates the connector panel.

                          Diagram                  Part                      Function



                                            Cart Access         Enables you to restart the cart by
                                            Reset Button        resetting it, in the event that the
                                                                cart is not functioning properly.




                                            Charge Input        The Charge Input is used to
                                                                attach the battery charger to the
                                                                cart.



                                            Communication       The Communication ports are
                                            Ports 1 and 2       used for communication with
                                                                external devices.
                                                                    Port 1: This port is
                                                                    preconfigured for
                                                                    communication with a
                                                                    personal computer for Cart
                                                                    Host software usage.
                                                                    Port 2: This port can be
                                                                    configured to communication
                                                                    with other external devices.

                                            12V Power           This outlet can be used to power
                                            Output              external devices.




                                                                               (Continued on next page)



January 2004
8                              Cart Overview                                                 Overview




Cart User Types    Avalo AC Medication Cart users are assigned access privileges based on job
            and    function. User types include:
Responsibilities       Admin: This user can perform all programming or event recall functions. This
                       user can access all areas of the cart and is responsible for adding new cart
                       users, modifying cart user profiles, and recalling events.
                       Normal: This user (typically a nurse) can access some or all areas of the cart
                       based on privileges the administrator assigns. In addition, the administrator
                       may authorize this user to change his or her own access codes. This user is
                       responsible for dispensing medication and then securing the cart.
                       Key User: Using a key, this user can access most areas of the cart.




Override Rights    Administrators can assign override rights to each user type. Override rights grant
                   users the use of a special Override Code that is assigned to the cart. The
                   Override Code bypasses the cart’s alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms and
                   is typically used while the cart is being restocked in the pharmacy.
                   Reference
                   For more information, see Using the Override Code on page 30.


                                                                                (Continued on next page)




                                                                                           January 2004
Overview                                                                  Cart Overview                  9




        Terms and     This table describes general terms used in this document.
        Definitions

                                   Term                                   Definition

                       Access Card                     An optional card-swipe feature that can be
                                                       used as an additional security requirement or
                                                       as the primary cart access method.

                       Access Code                     A four-digit personal identification number
                                                       (PIN) that provides cart access. This code can
                                                       be “General” (one access code per cart) or
                                                       “Specific” (one access code per authorized
                                                       user or group of users).

                       Cart Host software              An optional software package that enables
                                                       authorized users to program the cart and to
                                                       retrieve events, user profiles, and cart settings
                                                       from the cart.

                       Cart Settings File              A file that is used with the Cart Host software.
                                                       This file contains information about cart
                                                       settings.

                       LCD                             Liquid Crystal Display. The display screen near
                                                       the keypad that shows messages, date and
                                                       time settings, and user instructions.

                       Log File                        A file that is used with the Cart Host software.
                                                       This file contains information about events that
                                                       occurred on the cart. This file can be saved but
                                                       not modified.

                       Master Code                     A four-digit numeric code that enables an
                                                       authorized administrator to program the cart or
                                                       recall events.
                                                                                  (Continued on next page)




January 2004
10               Cart Overview                                              Overview




                  (Contd)
                   Term                             Definition

     Narcotic Code               A four-digit numeric code that must be entered
                                 before an authorized user can open any of the
                                 locked eNarc narcotics drawers. Available
                                 settings are “General” (one eNarc code per
                                 cart) or “Specific” (one eNarc code per
                                 authorized user or group of users.) and the
                                 following usage rules apply:
                                     If the access code is set to “General,” the
                                     Narcotics Code must be set to General
                                     unless the cart is configured with the
                                     access card accessory.
                                     If the access code is set to “Specific,” the
                                     Narcotics Code can be set to either
                                     “General” or “Specific,” depending on your
                                     needs.

     Override Code               A four-digit code assigned to the cart that
                                 bypasses alarms, timers, and relocking
                                 mechanisms. Typically, this function is used
                                 while the cart is being restocked in the
                                 pharmacy.

     Programming Mode            This mode enables an administrator to edit
                                 user access, edit cart settings, or recall events.

     Read Cart                   The Read Cart button displays in the Cart Host
                                 software user interface on the user file, cart
                                 settings file, or log file. This button enables an
                                 administrator to retrieve events, user profiles,
                                 and settings from the cart.

     Recall Events               A cart feature that enables an administrator to
                                 track cart activity, including user access and
                                 relocking activity.

     User #                      A unique, four-digit number that identifies the
                                 person using the cart. Unlike an access code,
                                 a User # cannot be modified after it is
                                 accepted.

     User File                   A file that is used with the Cart Host software.
                                 This file contains user profile information and
                                 can be modified.
                                                            (Continued on next page)



                                                                          January 2004
Overview                                                                Cart Overview             11




                                 (Contd)
                                  Term                                  Definition

                    Write Cart                       The Write Cart button displays in the Cart Host
                                                     software user interface on the user file and the
                                                     cart settings file. This button enables an
                                                     administrator to apply settings changes that
                                                     were made while using the Cart Host software
                                                     to the cart.


                   Note
                   User access and cart settings are defined later in this document.
                   If you are using the Cart Host software to set up user access and cart
                   settings, see:
                       Cart Settings File Defined on page 58.
                       User File Defined on page 73.

                   If you are using the cart to set up user access and cart settings, see:
                       User Access Settings Defined on page 122.
                       Cart Settings Defined on page 103.




  Pre-Configured   The Avalo AC Medication Cart is designed to accommodate the various needs
        Settings   and responsibilities of the people who use it. When your cart was initially
                   purchased, Artromick programed it to include settings and user access profiles
                   according to your organization’s specific requests. After delivery, a cart
                   administrator can edit the cart’s settings and user access profiles as needed.

                   See Programming the Cart Using the Host Software on page 35 or Programming
                   the Cart From the Cart on page 95 for more information.




January 2004
12   Cart Overview     Overview




                     January 2004
-13
                                                                                                                         13



                                                                                                                        2
                                                                    Using the Cart
          Contents   Overview ............................................................................................. 14
                                Introduction ....................................................................... 14
                     Accessing the Cart ............................................................................. 15
                               Introduction ....................................................................... 15
                               Accessing with Access Code Only ................................... 16
                               Accessing with Access Card Only .................................... 17
                               Accessing with Code and Access Card ............................ 18
                               Accessing Using a Key ..................................................... 19
                               Problems Accessing the Cart ........................................... 19
                     Testing and Charging the Battery .................................................... 22
                                Introduction ....................................................................... 22
                                Testing the battery ............................................................ 22
                                Charging the Battery......................................................... 23
                     Securing the Avalo AC Medication Cart .......................................... 24
                                Introduction ....................................................................... 24
                                Securing the Cart with the Keypad ................................... 24
                                Securing the Cart Manually .............................................. 25
                     Using the AutoLock Timer ................................................................ 26
                                Introduction ....................................................................... 26
                                AutoLock Activity .............................................................. 26
                                Relock Process................................................................. 27
                     Using eNarc Option ............................................................................ 28
                               Introduction ....................................................................... 28
                               Automatic
                               Re-Lock ............................................................................ 28
                               Alarms and Messages ...................................................... 28
                               eNarc Access Procedure .................................................. 29
                     Using the Override Code ................................................................... 30
                                Introduction ....................................................................... 30
                                Procedure ......................................................................... 30
                     Using the Night Light ......................................................................... 32
                                Turning the light on or off from the keypad ....................... 32
                                Setting an adjustable timer ............................................... 32
                     Opening the Rear Access Panel Door .............................................. 33
                               Introduction ....................................................................... 33
                               Procedure ......................................................................... 33




January 2004
14                             Overview                                                  Using the Cart




Overview


     Introduction   The procedures in this chapter explain the tasks associated with your everyday
                    use of the Avalo AC Medication Cart. This chapter contains the following topics:
                        Accessing the cart
                        Testing and charging the battery
                        Securing the cart
                        Using the AutoLock Timer
                        Using eNarc option
                        Using the Override Code
                        Using the Night Light
                        Opening the Rear Access Panel Door

                                                                                 (Continued on next page)




                                                                                            January 2004
Using the Cart                                                     Accessing the Cart                15




Accessing the Cart


      Introduction   The Avalo AC Medication Cart may be configured to use an access card as a
                     primary or secondary cart access method. At start-up, depending on your cart
                     configuration, you will access the cart in one or more of the following ways:

                             Access Method                             Description

                      Access Code Only                Enter a pre-set user access code. For
                                                      procedural information, see Accessing with
                                                      Access Code Only on page 16.

                      Access Card Only                Swipe your card. For procedural information,
                                                      see Accessing with Access Card Only on page
                                                      17.

                      Access Code and Access          Enter a pre-set user access code and swipe
                      Card                            your card. For procedural information, see
                                                      Accessing with Code and Access Card on
                                                      page 18.

                      Key                             Manually unlock the cart using a key. For
                                                      procedural information, see Accessing Using a
                                                      Key on page 19.


                     Complete the appropriate procedure for your Avalo Advantage Medication Cart
                     configuration.

                                                                                 (Continued on next page)




January 2004
16                          Accessing the Cart                                         Using the Cart




Accessing with   Complete this procedure to access the cart when it is configured to allow access
 Access Code     with an access code only.
         Only    Note
                 In order to complete the procedure, you must have a valid four-digit access
                 code. If you do not have the necessary access code, contact your cart
                 administrator.

                    Step                                    Action

                        1     Enter your four-digit access code.
                              Note
                              When you are entering your code, the Clear key works like a
                              backspace key on a keyboard. If you make a mistake while
                              entering your code, press Clear to delete the incorrect digit,
                              and enter the correct number.
                              System Response
                              As you type the code, the LCD displays asterisks for each
                              number. Also, if your KEY BEEP cart setting is set to ON,
                              you’ll hear a beep after each number that you press.
                              Note
                              The cart administrator sets the KEY BEEP cart setting. For
                              more information, see Modifying Cart Settings on page 103.

                        2     Did you enter the correct code?
                                  If yes, the LCD displays the following messages:
                                  HELLO!
                                  The cart unlocks and starts the AutoLock timer. The LCD
                                  displays the following message:
                                  ACCESS ALLOWED
                                  TIME DATE
                                  If no, see Problems Accessing the Cart on page 19.


                 You can now use the cart.
                 For more information about the AutoLock Timer, see Using the AutoLock
                 Timer on page 26.


                                                                               (Continued on next page)




                                                                                          January 2004
Using the Cart                                                  Accessing the Cart               17




  Accessing with   Complete this procedure to access the cart using an access card.
    Access Card    Note
           Only    In order to complete the procedure, you must have a programmed user
                   access card. If you do not have the necessary card, contact your cart
                   administrator.

                      Step                                   Action

                          1     Press Clear.
                                System Response
                                The LCD displays the following message:
                                PLEASE SWIPE CARD
                          2     Swipe your user access card through the access card slot.
                                System Response
                                Is your access card valid?
                                    If yes, the LCD displays the following welcome message:
                                    HELLO! JANE DOE
                                    The cart unlocks and starts the AutoLock timer. The LCD
                                    displays the following message:
                                    ACCESS ALLOWED
                                    TIME DATE
                                    If No, see Problems Accessing the Cart on page 19.


                   You can now use the cart.
                   For more information about the AutoLock Timer, see Using the AutoLock
                   Timer on page 26.


                                                                              (Continued on next page)




January 2004
18                          Accessing the Cart                                        Using the Cart




Accessing with   Complete this procedure to access the cart using a code/card configuration.
     Code and    Note
  Access Card    In order to complete the procedure, you must have a valid four-digit access
                 code and a programmed user access card. If you do not have the
                 necessary access code and card, contact your cart administrator.

                    Step                                    Action

                        1     Enter your four-digit access code.
                              Note
                              When you are entering your code, the Clear key works like a
                              backspace key on a keyboard. If you make a mistake while
                              entering your code, press Clear to delete the incorrect
                              number, and enter the correct number.
                              System Response
                              As you type the code, the LCD displays asterisks for each
                              number. Also, if your KEY BEEP cart setting is set to ON,
                              you’ll hear a beep after each number that you press.

                        2     Did you enter the correct code?
                                  If yes, the LCD displays the following message:
                                  PLEASE SWIPE CARD
                                  Go to the next step.
                                  If no, see Problems Accessing the Cart on page 19.

                        3     Swipe your user access card through the access card slot.
                              System Response
                              Is your access card valid?
                                  If yes, the LCD displays the following welcome message:
                                  HELLO! JANE DOE
                                  The cart unlocks and starts the AutoLock timer. The LCD
                                  displays the following message
                                  ACCESS ALLOWED
                                  TIME DATE
                                  If no, see Problems Accessing the Cart on page 19.


                 You can now use the cart. For more information about the AutoLock Timer,
                 see Using the AutoLock Timer on page 26.

                                                                              (Continued on next page)


                                                                                         January 2004
Using the Cart                                                     Accessing the Cart               19




Accessing Using    Complete this procedure to access the cart using the key.
          a Key    Note
                   In order to complete the procedure, you must have the proper key to access
                   the cart. If you do not have a key, contact your cart administrator.

                      Step                                     Action

                          1     Insert the key in the lock core.

                          2     Push the key in and turn the key to the right.
                                System Response
                                The lock core releases and the LCD displays the following
                                message:
                                KEY ACCESS ALLOWED
                                TIME DATE

                   You can now use the cart.




       Problems    For security purposes, the Avalo AC Medication Cart limits the time period
   Accessing the   in which you may attempt to enter the correct access code and valid access
            Cart   card.
                   When you exceed the time interval, the cart:
                       Reverts to idle mode
                       Secures the cart

                                                                                 (Continued on next page)




January 2004
20              Accessing the Cart                                          Using the Cart




     The following table describes the process that starts when a user enters in invalid
     access code or access card.


        Stage                                 Description

          1       The first time you enter an incorrect code or swipe an invalid card,
                  the cart alarm beeps once.
                  System Response
                  The LCD displays the following message:
                  INCORRECT CODE
                  PLEASE RE-ENTER CODE
                  or
                  INVALID CARD
                  PLEASE RE-SWIPE CARD
          2       After five seconds, if you do not enter any code or swipe a card, the
                  LCD display clears as the system reverts to idle mode. You or
                  another user may then make a second attempt.

          3       At second attempt, if you enter a code or swipe the card and:
                       The code was correct or swiped card was valid, you can
                       continue with Step 1 in the appropriate procedure for your cart
                       configuration:
                            Accessing with Access Code Only on page 16.
                            Accessing with Code and Access Card on page 18.
                            Accessing with Access Card Only on page 17.
                       The code was incorrect code or the swiped card was invalid,
                       the cart’s alarm beeps twice.
                       System Response
                       The LCD displays the following message:
                       INCORRECT CODE
                       PLEASE RE-ENTER CODE
                       IF INCORRECT ALARM WILL SOUND
                       or
                       INVALID CARD
                       PLEASE RE-SWIPE CARD
                       IF INVALID ALARM WILL SOUND
                                                                 (Continued on next page)




                                                                              January 2004
Using the Cart                                               Accessing the Cart                 21




                 (Contd)
                  Stage                                Description

                   4       After five seconds, if you do not enter any code or swipe a card, the
                           LCD display clears as the system reverts to idle mode. You or
                           another user may then make a third attempt.

                   5       At the third attempt, if you enter a code or swipe the card and:
                               The code was correct or swiped card was valid, you can
                               continue with Step 1 in the appropriate procedure for your cart
                               configuration:
                                    Accessing with Access Code Only on page 16.
                                    Accessing with Code and Access Card on page 18.
                                    Accessing with Access Card Only on page 17.
                               The code was incorrect code or the swiped card was invalid,
                               the LCD displays the following message and the cart alarm
                               beeps continuously for one minute or until you enter a correct
                               access code or swipe a valid card:
                               INCORRECT CODE
                               PLEASE RE-ENTER CODE
                               or
                               INVALID CARD
                               PLEASE RE-SWIPE CARD
                   6       At the fourth attempt, if you enter a code or swipe the card within
                           the one-minute beeping period and:
                               The code was correct or swiped card was valid, the alarm stops
                               and you can continue with Step 1 in the appropriate procedure
                               for your cart configuration:
                                    Accessing with Access Code Only on page 16.
                                    Accessing with Code and Access Card on page 18.
                                    Accessing with Access Card Only on page 17.
                               The code was incorrect code or the swiped card was invalid,
                               the LCD re-displays the message in Stage 5 and resets the
                               one-minute alarm. The alarm continues beeping until one
                               minute transpires after your last incorrect attempt. After one
                               minute the cart reverts to idle mode.




January 2004
22                              Testing and Charging the Battery                          Using the Cart




Testing and Charging the Battery


     Introduction   Testing the Avalo AC Medication Cart’s battery is an easy way to ensure that you
                    have enough power to operate the cart.

                    Do not use the Avalo AC Medication Cart when the battery’s charge is low.

                    Typically, the battery supplies power to the keypad and relocking mechanism for
                    approximately five days or 1,000 lock/relock cycles (based on the standard Avalo
                    AC Power System). However, if the battery is low, the cart’s Intelligent Power
                    Management System may discontinue power to non-critical components, such as
                    the night light, to save power for critical components, such as eNarc drawer
                    operation. Power to non-critical components is restored after the battery begins to
                    recharge.

                    When the battery’s charge is depleted, the LCD displays a BATTERY         NEEDS
                    RECHARGED SOON warning.



      Testing the   To test the battery, press BATTERY.
          battery   Note
                    If you press BATTERY while the battery is charging, the LCD displays a
                    BATTERY STATUS UNAVAILABLE message.
                    System Response
                    The LCD displays one of the following messages:
                        BATTERY CHARGE IS xx%: Indicates that the battery’s charge is
                        sufficient to operate the cart.
                        BATTERY NEEDS RECHARGED SOON!: The battery’s charge is below
                        a critical level. You must recharge the battery.

                                                                                  (Continued on next page)




                                                                                             January 2004
Using the Cart                                        Testing and Charging the Battery              23




     Charging the   If the LCD displays a BATTERY      NEEDS RECHARGED SOON message, you
          Battery   must recharge the battery.

                    To recharge the battery, connect the Recharger Unit into the CHARGE outlet. The
                    Charge outlet is located on the back of the Avalo AC Medication cart in the AC
                    Systems Support Panel.
                    Important
                    The battery charge and lock/relock information is based on the standard
                    Avalo AC Power System. If the battery’s charge is completely depleted, fully
                    recharging the unit may take three or more hours. However, to access the
                    cart’s functionality while the battery charges, connect the Recharger Unit to
                    the cart’s charge outlet and to a 110v wall outlet. Allow the battery to
                    recharge for approximately two minutes before you access the cart.




January 2004
24                              Securing the Avalo AC Medication Cart                       Using the Cart




Securing the Avalo AC Medication Cart


     Introduction    As a cart user, it is extremely important that you secure the Avalo AC Medication
                     cart after each use. When the cart is secured, its lock is retracted, the LCD is
                     blank, and users or unauthorized personnel cannot interact with the cart.

                     The cart is equipped with an AutoLock™ system that enables you to secure the
                     cart manually or by using the keypad. In addition, the cart’s Auto Secure setting
                     automatically secures the cart after a pre-defined length of time.

                     If you have the optional eNarc accessory and you try to secure the cart when an
                     eNarc drawer is open, the cart sounds an alarm.




     Securing the    Complete this procedure to secure the cart using the keypad.
     Cart with the
          Keypad        Step                                     Action

                          1       Close all drawers.

                          2       Press Secure.
                                  Note
                                  If an alarm sounds, verify that all eNarc drawers are closed
                                  tightly.
                                  System Response
                                  The AutoLock system begins retracting the lock and the LCD
                                  displays the following messages:
                                  SECURING CART
                                  followed by:
                                  CART SECURED


                                                                                    (Continued on next page)




                                                                                               January 2004
Using the Cart                                  Securing the Avalo AC Medication Cart   25




     Securing the   Complete this procedure to secure the cart manually.
    Cart Manually
                       Step                                     Action

                         1       Close all drawers.

                         2       Press the lock core into the cart until it engages.
                                 System Response
                                 The LCD displays the following messages:
                                 CART SECURED
                                 Followed by:
                                 AUTO SECURE RESET




January 2004
26                              Using the AutoLock Timer                                    Using the Cart




Using the AutoLock Timer


     Introduction   When your cart is not in use, it is in idle mode. Once you have unlocked the cart, it
                    automatically starts its AutoLock timer. The timer monitors cart activity and is
                    programmed to automatically secure the cart and revert to idle mode whenever
                    the cart remains motionless for a preconfigured relock time interval of 1 to 99
                    minutes.

                    The cart administrator sets the AutoLock time interval using the Auto Secure
                    setting. The default setting is five minutes.
                    Reference
                    See Modifying Cart Settings on page 103 for information on setting the
                    preconfigured relock time interval.

                    When the cart auto-secures, you must access the cart following the appropriate
                    cart access instructions for your configuration.
                    Reference
                    For more information, see Accessing the Cart on page 15.




       AutoLock     The cart has two functions related to the AutoLock timer:
        Activity        If the MTN DETECTOR cart setting is not set to OFF and the cart is moved,
                        the AutoLock timer resets and the LCD displays the following message for
                        five seconds:
                        CART MOVED - TIMER RESET
                        If the Clear key is pressed, the timer resets.
                        Note
                        The cart administrator sets the MTN DETECTOR cart setting. For more
                        information, see Modifying Cart Settings on page 103.
                        Each time the preset relock time interval elapses, the cart initiates the relock
                        process.

                                                                                    (Continued on next page)




                                                                                               January 2004
Using the Cart                                                Using the AutoLock Timer                   27




  Relock Process   The following table describes the relock process.

                      Stage                                    Description

                        1       When the cart has been inactive for the configured relock time
                                interval, the cart beeps twice.
                                System Response
                                The LCD displays the following message:
                                CART WILL AUTO SECURE IN 10 SECONDS
                                Note
                                To reset the relock time interval, use or move the cart. In this case,
                                the LCD displays the following message:
                                ACCESS ALLOWED
                                TIME DATE
                        2       The LCD shows the 10-second countdown by changing the display
                                every two seconds.
                                System Response
                                The LCD displays the following messages accordingly:
                                CART WILL AUTO SECURE IN 8 SECONDS
                                CART WILL AUTO SECURE IN 6 SECONDS
                                And so forth.

                        3       When the countdown elapses, the cart relock alarm beeps four
                                times.
                                System Response
                                The LCD displays the following message.
                                CART IS AUTO SECURING
                        4       The cart locks (the lock core retracts).
                                System Response
                                The LCD displays the following message:
                                CART SECURED
                        5       The cart reverts to idle mode.




January 2004
28                              Using eNarc Option                                          Using the Cart




Using eNarc Option


     Introduction   Electronic Keyless Narcotic Storage (eNarc) is an optional accessory that
                    provides secure, code-based access to specific narcotic drawers. Depending on
                    your cart, an administrator can assign a user a four-digit access code to narcotics
                    drawer 1, narcotics drawer 2, or both, as applicable.




      Automatic     When accessing a narcotics drawer, the cart enables you to have open access to
       Re-Lock      the drawer for four seconds before re-locking. When you open an eNarc narcotics
                    drawer, the cart displays the following message:
                    NARC DRAWER OPEN
                    Note
                    If you fail to open a drawer within four seconds of initiating access, the
                    drawer automatically re-locks itself.
                    Reference
                    See eNarc Access Procedure on page 29 for instructions for accessing
                    eNarc drawers.




     Alarms and     In the event of a narcotics drawer access error or an error in securing the cart,
      Messages      audible alarms sound and the LCD displays messages indicating the error. These
                    messages include:

                                Message                                  Description

                     PLEASE CLOSE                      You attempted to secure the cart or the cart
                     NARCOTICS DRAWER                  attempted to auto-secure while the drawer was
                                                       open. .

                     SECURE DRAWER.CODE                You attempted to access to the eNarc drawers
                     REQD FOR ACCESS                   without using a valid access code.

                     PLEASE CLOSE                      You repeatedly attempted to access the drawer
                     SECURE DRAWER                     without a valid access code. This message is
                                                       accompanied by a continuous audible warning.



                                                                                    (Continued on next page)




                                                                                                 January 2004
Using the Cart                                                    Using eNarc Option             29




    eNarc Access   Complete this procedure to access the eNarc drawers.
       Procedure
                      Step                                     Action

                        1      Access the cart.
                               Reference
                               For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Cart on
                               page 15.

                        2      Press the eNarc key (      ) to initiate access.
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               ENTER NARCOTIC DRAWER CODE
                        3      Enter your four-digit narcotics code.
                               Note
                               If you do not have a valid narcotics code, contact your
                               administrator.

                        4      Do one of the following:
                                   If the LCD displays the following message:
                                   NARCOTIC DRAWER PRESS 1 OR 2
                                   Go to the next step.
                                   If the eNarc drawer clicks and opens, go to step 6.

                        5      Enter the number of drawer to access.
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               NARC ACCESS ALLOWED
                        6      After you are finished accessing the drawer contents, close the
                               narcotics drawer.
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               NARCOTICS DRAWER IS SECURE
                        7      Secure the cart or continue with other tasks.




January 2004
30                             Using the Override Code                                    Using the Cart




Using the Override Code

     Introduction   Administrators can assign override rights, which grant users the use of a special
                    Override Code assigned to the cart. The Override Code bypasses the cart’s
                    alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms and is typically used while the cart is
                    being restocked in the pharmacy.



      Procedure     Complete the following procedure to use the Override Code.

                       Step                                    Action

                         1       Access the cart.
                                 Reference
                                 For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Cart on
                                 page 15.

                         2       Press Function.
                                 System Response
                                 The LCD displays the following message:
                                 ENTER CART OVERRIDE MODE? 1-YES, 2-NO
                                 Note
                                 If override rights are not assigned, the LCD displays one of
                                 the following messages:
                                 CHANGE CODE
                                 or
                                 NO PERSONAL EDITING ALLOWED
                         3       Press 1 (YES).
                                 System Response
                                 The LCD displays the following message:
                                 PLEASE ENTER OVERRIDE CODE
                                                                               (Continued on next page)




                                                                                             January 2004
Using the Cart                                      Using the Override Code               31




                 Step                                 Action

                  4     Enter your Override Code.
                        System Response
                        The LCD displays the following message:
                        OVRRD. ACCESS ALLOWED
                        Note
                        If you do not have a valid override code, contact your administrator.

                  5     Restock the cart.

                  6     Close all drawers.

                  7     Secure the cart manually or press SECURE.




January 2004
32                              Using the Night Light                                    Using the Cart




Using the Night Light


Turning the light   To to turn the light on or off, press Light.
  on or off from    Note
     the keypad     If the cart’s battery charge is low, the cart’s night light may shut off to
                    conserve power. To resume power to the night light, recharge the battery.

                    For more information, see Charging the Battery on page 23.




      Setting an    In Programming Mode, an administrator can edit the cart’s light time interval
adjustable timer    setting to automatically turn off after the cart is secure. The length of time is
                    adjustable from 01 minute to 99 minutes. The default time that the light stays on
                    after the cart is secure is 01 minute.

                    For procedural information, see Modifying Cart Settings on page 103.




                                                                                            January 2004
Using the Cart                                    Opening the Rear Access Panel Door                 33




Opening the Rear Access Panel Door


      Introduction   Depending on your cart’s configuration, you may need to open the rear access
                     panel door to access optional accessories, such as the internal trash bin.




         Procedure   Complete the following procedure to open the cart’s rear access panel door.

                        Step                                    Action

                          1       Face the back of the cart and locate the round black button on the
                                  right side panel, in the center area.

                          2       Push the button. A spring releases the button outward so that it
                                  now works like a knob.

                          3       Turn the knob to the right. The door panel releases so that you can
                                  pull it open.




January 2004
34   Opening the Rear Access Panel Door   Using the Cart




                                            January 2004
-35
                                                                                                                       35



                                                                                                                        3
                              Programming the Cart
                             Using the Host Software
          Contents   Overview ............................................................................................. 38
                                Introduction ....................................................................... 38
                                System Requirements ...................................................... 38
                                Event, User, and Cart Setting Files .................................. 39
                                Read Cart and Write Cart Functionality ............................ 39
                                Arranging Open Files........................................................ 39
                     Installing the Host Software .............................................................. 40
                                  Procedure ......................................................................... 40
                     Accessing the Host Software ............................................................ 42
                               Procedure ......................................................................... 42
                     Connecting the Host Software to the Cart ....................................... 43
                               Introduction ....................................................................... 43
                               Connection Stages ........................................................... 43
                               Preparing Your Cart.......................................................... 44
                               Connecting Your PC or Laptop to the Cart ....................... 46
                               Configuring COM Port Settings ........................................ 47
                     Closing the Host Software Connection ............................................ 49
                                Introduction ....................................................................... 49
                                Closing the Host Software Connection
                                Using the Cart................................................................... 49
                                Closing the Host Software Connection
                                Using the Software ........................................................... 50
                     Recalling Events Using Host Software ............................................ 51
                                Introduction ....................................................................... 51
                                Event Master List .............................................................. 51
                                Events Log File Defined ................................................... 51
                                Creating an Events Log File ............................................. 53
                                Accessing the Events Log File.......................................... 54
                                Updating an Events Log File ............................................ 54
                                Sorting Events .................................................................. 55
                     Managing Cart Settings ..................................................................... 56
                               Introduction ....................................................................... 56
                               Managing User Access Codes ......................................... 56

                                                                                                 (Continued on next page)



January 2004
36                                          Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




     Creating a Cart Settings File ..............................................................58
                Introduction....................................................................... 58
                Cart Settings File Defined ................................................ 58
                Procedure......................................................................... 64
     Accessing Cart Settings File .............................................................66
               Procedure......................................................................... 66
     Reading Cart Settings ........................................................................67
               Introduction....................................................................... 67
               Procedure......................................................................... 67
     Writing Cart Settings to the Cart .......................................................68
                Introduction....................................................................... 68
                Procedure......................................................................... 68
     Modifying a Cart Settings File ...........................................................69
                Introduction....................................................................... 69
                Procedure......................................................................... 70
     Managing Cart Users ..........................................................................71
               Introduction....................................................................... 71
               Managing General User Access....................................... 71
               Managing Specific User Access....................................... 72
               Managing Users on Multiple Carts ................................... 72
     Creating a User File ............................................................................73
                Introduction....................................................................... 73
                User File Defined.............................................................. 73
                Procedure......................................................................... 78
     Accessing a User File .........................................................................79
               Procedure......................................................................... 79
     Reading User Information ..................................................................80
               Introduction....................................................................... 80
               Procedure......................................................................... 80
     Writing Users to the Cart ...................................................................81
                Introduction....................................................................... 81
                Procedure......................................................................... 81
     Adding a Group of Users ...................................................................82
               Introduction....................................................................... 82
               Add Group Dialog Box Settings Defined .......................... 82
               Procedure......................................................................... 84

                                                                             (Continued on next page)




                                                                                          January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                                                                                       37




                                   Adding a New User .............................................................................85
                                             Introduction....................................................................... 85
                                             Add User Dialog Box Settings Defined............................. 85
                                             Procedure......................................................................... 87
                                   Modifying a User Profile .....................................................................89
                                              Introduction....................................................................... 89
                                              Modifying A User’s Access Settings................................. 89
                                              Modifying a User’s eNarc Access Code Settings ............. 91
                                   Deleting a User ....................................................................................93
                                               Introduction....................................................................... 93
                                               Procedure......................................................................... 93




January 2004
38            Overview                                    Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




Overview


     Introduction   Avalo Advantage Cart Host software enables administrators to read information
                    from the cart and to program the cart.

                    The benefits of using the Cart Host software include:
                         The ability to specify the names of users
                         Increased speed in performing tasks, such as adding users

                    After the software is installed and set up, administrators can connect to the cart to
                    retrieve user, cart setting, and event data. Administrators can also use the
                    software to modify, add, or delete users and cart settings and then apply (write)
                    any data changes to the cart.
                    Note
                    Although using the Cart Host software is the recommended method, you
                    can also program the cart from the cart. For more information, see
                    Programming the Cart From the Cart on page 95.




       System       In order to install and run the Cart Host software, your PC or laptop must be
 Requirements       equipped with the following minimum requirements:
                         Windows® 98, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000 SP3, or Windows® XP
                         Pentium or higher processor
                         VGA or higher resolution screen supported by Microsoft Corporation
                         32 MB of RAM
                         An open serial port (COM 1 to COM 8 are supported)
                         A mouse or other pointing device

                                                                                    (Continued on next page)




                                                                                               January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                                          Overview               39




 Event, User, and         The Cart Host software uses three types of files to manage the cart’s data. The
Cart Setting Files        types of files are:
                              Event Log File: An event log file (*.log) is a read-only file that contains events
                              that occurred on the cart. The system’s Read Cart functionality retrieves
                              events from the cart and then populates the log file. The log file can include
                              approximately 4,000 events; the most recent event displays at the end of the
                              file. You can sort the order in which events display on the log file or print the
                              log file, depending on your needs.
                              User File: A user file (*.usr) contains user profile and access information. The
                              system’s Read Cart functionality retrieves user information from the cart; the
                              system’s Write Cart functionality enables you to apply changes that you make
                              in the file to the cart.
                              Cart Settings File: A cart settings file (*.crt) contains all of the settings on the
                              cart. The system’s Read Cart functionality retrieves cart setting information
                              from the cart; the system’s Write Cart functionality enables you to apply
                              changes that you make in the file to the cart.




   Read Cart and          The Cart Host software’s Read Cart functionality enables you to retrieve events,
      Write Cart          user profiles, and settings from the cart. You can save the data that you retrieve in
    Functionality         log files, user files, or cart setting files, which you can access using the Cart Host
                          software.

                          The Write Cart functionality enables you to apply changes that you make to a
                          user file or a cart settings file to the cart. The Write Cart functionality is not
                          applicable to log files, which are view-only lists of events that occurred on the cart.

                          Use of the Read Cart and Write Cart functionality enables you to view the cart’s
                          current data and to ensure that the data stored by the Cart Host software and the
                          data stored on the cart remain in sync.




        Arranging         The Cart Host software’s Cascade feature enables you to arrange open files in a
        Open Files        tiered order for easier viewing. To use the Cascade feature, select Cascade from
                          the Window menu.




January 2004
40         Installing the Host Software                 Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




Installing the Host Software


      Procedure    Complete the following procedure to install the Cart Host software.
                   Note
                   Depending on the current version of your operating system, the Setup
                   wizard may prompt you to upgrade your software. Click Yes, and the Avalo
                   Advantage Cart Host software program performs this operation.


                       Step                                     Action

                          1      Start Microsoft® Windows®.

                          2      Close all open applications.

                          3      Insert the Avalo Cart Host CD into your PC or laptop’s CD-ROM
                                 drive.

                          4      On the Windows taskbar, click Start.

                          5      Click Run...
                                 System Response
                                 The Run dialog box displays.




                          6      Type the following: D:setup.exe
                                 Note
                                 If your CD-ROM is not located on the D drive, substitute the
                                 appropriate drive letter.
                                                                                (Continued on next page)




                                                                                              January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                         Installing the Host Software         41




                             (Contd)
                              Step                                        Action

                                7        Press OK.
                                         System Response
                                         The Setup wizard begins to copy files and then displays a
                                         prompt recommending that you close applications that may
                                         be running.

                                8        Click OK.
                                         System Response
                                         The Setup wizard displays a destination directory dialog box.

                                9        Do you want to install the Artromick Avalo Cart Host software to the
                                         default destination directory?
                                         Note
                                         The default directory location is:
                                         C:Program FilesArtromickAvaloHost
                                               If yes, click the button that contains a computer image.
                                               If no,
                                                   Click Change Directory.
                                                   Type or navigate to the desired path location.
                                                   Click OK.
                                         System Response
                                         Installation begins. The Setup wizard displays a Choose
                                         Program Group dialog box.

                               10        Do you want to use the default Program Group?
                                         Note
                                         The default Program Group is Artromick.
                                               If yes, click Continue.
                                               If no,
                                                   Type the name of the Program Group that you want to use.
                                                   Click Continue.
                                         System Response
                                         The Setup wizard begins installing Data Access components.
                                         After installation is complete, the Setup wizard displays a
                                         message indicating that setup was successful.

                               11        Click OK.




January 2004
42         Accessing the Host Software                   Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




Accessing the Host Software


     Procedure   Complete the following procedure to access the Cart Host software.

                     Step                                      Action

                       1      On the Windows taskbar, click Start.

                       2      Did you install the Cart Host software in the default destination
                              directory?
                              Note
                              The default directory location is:
                              C:Program FilesArtromickAvaloHost
                                  If yes,
                                         Point to Programs.
                                         Point to Artromick.
                                         Point to Avalo Cart Host.
                                  If no,
                                         Depending on your operating system, use File Manager or
                                         Windows Explorer to navigate to the Artromick directory
                                         location you selected.
                                         Double-click to open the directory.
                                         Double-click to open the Avalo Host folder.
                                         Double-click CartHost.
                              System Response
                              The Cart Host software opens.




                                                                                             January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software        Connecting the Host Software to the Cart               43




Connecting the Host Software to the Cart


      Introduction        Before you can use the Cart Host software, you must:
                              Prepare the cart
                              Configure settings in the Cart Host software (first time only)
                              Connect your PC or laptop to the cart.

                          The procedures in this section provide step-by-step instructions for completing
                          these tasks.




       Connection         This table describes the stages that you must complete in order to connect to the
           Stages         cart using the Cart Host software. This table also describes when to complete the
                          task.

                             Stage                     Description                     When Do I Do This?

                               1       Prepare the cart for connection by opening     Each time you want to
                                       a Host link on the cart.                       use the Cart Host
                                                                                      software.
                                       Reference
                                       For step-by-step instructions, see
                                       Preparing Your Cart on page 44.

                               2       Connect your PC or laptop to the cart using    Each time you want to
                                       the adapter cord that came with your           use the Cart Host
                                       Software Connection Kit.                       software.
                                       Reference
                                       For step-by-step instructions, see
                                       Connecting Your PC or Laptop to the
                                       Cart on page 46.

                               3       Configure Communications (COM) Port            The first time you use
                                       settings in the Cart Host software to match    the Cart Host software
                                       COM port settings on your PC or laptop.        only.
                                       Reference
                                       For step-by-step instructions, see
                                       Configuring COM Port Settings on
                                       page 47.



                                                                                         (Continued on next page)


January 2004
44         Connecting the Host Software to the Cart       Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




Preparing Your    Complete the following procedure to prepare your cart for connection.
          Cart    Note
                  You must complete the following procedure each time you use the Cart
                  Host software.


                     Step                                       Action

                         1     On the cart, press Function.
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               PROGRAMMING MODE? 1-YES 2-NO
                         2     Press 1 (YES).
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays one of the following messages:
                               PLEASE ENTER ACCESS CODE
                               or
                               PLEASE SWIPE CARD
                         3     Do one of the following:
                                    If your cart’s configuration requires an access code only:
                                    Enter your access code. Go to the next step.
                                    If your cart’s configuration requires an access card only:
                                    Swipe your card. Go to the next step.
                                    If your cart’s configuration requires an access code and
                                    an access card: Enter your access card. Swipe your card. Go
                                    to the next step.
                               Note
                               If you enter a code that is not assigned to an administrator,
                               the system prompts you to re-enter the code or to re-swipe
                               your card, as applicable. If you find that your code does not
                               work, contact your supervisor.
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               PLEASE ENTER CART MASTER CODE


                                                                                 (Continued on next page)




                                                                                               January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software         Connecting the Host Software to the Cart               45




                             (Contd)
                              Step                                      Action

                                4        Enter your cart’s master code.
                                         System Response
                                         The LCD displays the following message:
                                         1-RECALL EVENTS
                                         2-EDIT PROGRAM
                                         Note
                                         If your cart’s master code is not valid, the LCD prompts you
                                         to re-enter the code until the correct code is entered. If you
                                         find that your code does not work, contact your supervisor.

                                5        Press 1 (RECALL EVENTS).
                                         System Response
                                         The LCD displays the following message:
                                         REVIEW EVENTS?
                                         1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                                6        Press 2 (No).
                                         System Response
                                         The LCD displays the following message:
                                         LINK TO HOST?
                                         1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                                7        Press 1 (Yes).
                                         System Response
                                         The LCD displays the following message:
                                         LINK TO HOST OPEN
                                         Note
                                         This link remains open until you close it. For step-by-step
                                         instructions on closing the connection, see Closing the Host
                                         Software Connection on page 49.


                          You must now connect your PC or laptop to the cart.
                          Reference
                          For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting Your PC or Laptop to the Cart
                          on page 46.


                                                                                          (Continued on next page)




January 2004
46          Connecting the Host Software to the Cart      Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




Connecting Your     Complete the following procedure to connect your PC or laptop to the cart using
 PC or Laptop to    the cart’s adapter cable.
        the Cart    Note
                    You must complete the following procedure each time you use the Cart
                    Host software.

                       Step                                      Action

                           1      Plug one end of the adapter cord that came with your cart into a
                                  Communication port on the back of your cart.
                                  Note
                                  The cart includes two communication ports. These ports are
                                  located on the back of the Avalo AC Medication cart in the
                                  Communication section of the connector panel (AC Systems
                                  Support Panel). The ports are labeled “1” and “2.” Port 1 is
                                  typically configured for use with the Cart Host software.
                                  Reference
                                  For more information, see Connector Panel Parts and
                                  Functions on page 7.

                           2      Plug the other end of the adapter cord into the correct serial port on
                                  your PC or laptop.


                    If this is the first time you are using the Cart Host software, you must
                    configure the Cart Host software COM port settings.
                    Reference
                    For step-by-step instructions, see Configuring COM Port Settings on page
                    47.


                                                                                     (Continued on next page)




                                                                                                January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software            Connecting the Host Software to the Cart              47




      Configuring         Use this procedure to configure the COM port settings in the Cart Host software to
        COM Port          match COM port settings on your PC or laptop. This configuration enables you to
         Settings         connect to the cart through the COM port on your PC or laptop.
                          Note
                          The Cart Host software saves your COM port settings. Therefore, you only
                          need to complete the following procedure the first time you use the
                          software.


                              Step                                       Action

                                 1       If necessary, start Windows on your PC or laptop.

                                 2       View your PC or laptop’s Communications (COM) Port settings.
                                         Make note of the following settings:
                                               Port name (COM 1, COM 2, etc.)
                                               Bits per Second (baud rate)
                                               Parity
                                               Data Bits
                                               Stop Bits

                                         You will need to know these settings later in this procedure.
                                         Note
                                         To view your Communication Port settings in Windows 98 or
                                         in Windows 2000, open the Device Manager. Double-click
                                         Ports (COM&LPT). Double-click the COM port that you want
                                         to use. Select the Port Settings tab. For assistance, contact
                                         your information systems department.
                                         Reference
                                         For information on opening Device Manager, consult your
                                         Windows online Help system.

                                 3       Open the Cart Host software.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                         Software on page 42.

                                 4       From the File menu, select Com Port Setup.
                                         System Response
                                         The Cart Host software displays the Com Setup dialog box.
                                                                                         (Continued on next page)




January 2004
48   Connecting the Host Software to the Cart    Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




              (Contd)
               Step                                     Action

                 5       View the default settings that display on the dialog box.
                         Note
                         The default settings are typically configured correctly.

                 6       Refer to the values that you wrote down in step 2 of this
                         procedure and make adjustments as needed.

                 7       Click OK.
                         System Response
                         The Cart Host software saves your COM port settings and
                         the Com Setup dialog box closes.


            You can now use the Cart Host software.




                                                                                     January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software            Closing the Host Software Connection                 49




Closing the Host Software Connection


      Introduction        After you finish using the Cart Host software, you must close the connection link
                          between your cart and the software before you can use the cart for other tasks.

                          When the link to the Cart Host software is open on the cart, the cart’s LCD
                          displays the following message:
                          LINK TO HOST OPEN

                          In addition, when the cart and Cart Host software are communicating, a status
                          message displays in the software at the bottom of the user file, cart settings file, or
                          log file.

                          You can close the connection link using either the cart or the Cart Host software.
                          The procedures for both methods are described in the following sections.




Closing the Host          Complete the following procedure to close the Cart Host software connection
       Software           using the cart.
     Connection
  Using the Cart              Step                                      Action

                                1        From the cart, press ESC.
                                         System Response
                                         The LCD briefly displays the cart’s identification information
                                         followed by a blank screen.

                                2        Disconnect the cart’s adapter cable from the back of your PC or
                                         laptop.

                                3        Disconnect the adapter cable from the back of the cart, if desired.



                                                                                           (Continued on next page)




January 2004
50          Closing the Host Software Connection       Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




Closing the Host   Complete the following procedure to close the Cart Host software connection
       Software    using the software.
     Connection
       Using the       Step                                   Action
       Software
                         1      From the File menu, select Exit.
                                System Response
                                The Cart Host software displays the Exit Host dialog box
                                asking whether you want to disconnect from the cart.

                         2      Click Yes.
                                System Response
                                The software closes. The LCD briefly displays the cart’s
                                identification information followed by a blank screen.
                                Note
                                If you click No on the Exit Host dialog box, the Cart Host
                                software closes, but the cart’s LCD still displays:
                                LINK TO HOST OPEN
                         3      Disconnect the cart’s adapter cable from the back of your PC or
                                laptop.

                         4      Disconnect the adapter cable from the back of the cart, if desired.




                                                                                             January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                Recalling Events Using Host Software               51




Recalling Events Using Host Software


      Introduction        The cart stores almost 4,000 events in its memory. Depending on the number of
                          events generated each day, the cart memory may contain events from several
                          weeks back.

                          Using the Host software, you can “Read” events that occur on the cart and then
                          save those events to a log file.

                          In addition, you can open log files that you create to view previous events and sort
                          the events that display on the log file.




     Event Master         The Cart Host software log file uses codes to indicate events. The meanings of
             List         the events codes are detailed in the Event Master List. You can use the Event
                          Master List as a reference guide when viewing events.
                          Reference
                          For more information, see Appendix A, "Event Master List," in this guide.




  Events Log File         The following table describes the fields on the log file.
         Defined          Note
                          When you open a new log file, it contains blank fields. After you press the
                          Read Cart button, the Cart Host software populates the log file with codes
                          indicating events from the cart.


                            Field Name                                    Definition

                            SN                 Cart serial number.

                            Name               Cart name.

                            Time               Time that the log file was read from the cart.

                            Date               Date that the log file was read from the cart.

                            Code Type          A General or Specific value, which indicates the type of access
                                               code that cart requires.
                                                                                          (Continued on next page)




January 2004
52   Recalling Events Using Host Software       Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




               (Contd)
             Field Name                                Definition

             Secure Time    The cart’s auto secure delay setting. This is the number of
                            minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the cart secures
                            itself. You can adjust this setting, which can be set from 01
                            minute to 99 minutes, using the Cart Host software or from the
                            cart. This number must be in a two-digit format. The default
                            setting is 05 minutes.

             Personal       A YES or NO value, which indicates whether the user has
             Editing        personal editing capabilities.

             Num            A number indicating the order in which events occurred. The
                            lowest number is the oldest event; the highest number is the
                            newest event. The log file can display approximately 4,000
                            events.

             Event          The name of the event.
                            Note
                            To view event-related codes, see Appendix A, "Event
                            Master List," in this guide.

             ID             The ID assigned to the event.

             Name           If the cart’s Access Code setting is configured as Specific,
                            meaning the cart is configured for multiple users, this field
                            displays the name of person who accessed the cart.

             Time           The time that the event occurred.

             Date           The date that the event occurred.

             Description    Description of the event that occurred.

             Read Cart      Instructs the software to read events from the cart.

             Close          Exits the Cart Host software.



                                                                          (Continued on next page)




                                                                                     January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software            Recalling Events Using Host Software               53




     Creating an          Complete the following procedure to create a new events log file using the Cart
  Events Log File         Host software.

                              Step                                     Action

                                1        Connect to the cart.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                         Software to the Cart on page 43.

                                2        Access the Cart Host software.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                         Software on page 42.

                                3        From the File menu, select New.

                                4        Select Log File.
                                         System Response
                                         The Cart Host software opens a new, blank log file.

                                5        Click Read Cart.
                                         System Response
                                         The Cart Host software reads the cart and populates the log
                                         file with events that occurred.

                                6        From the File menu, select Save.
                                         System Response
                                         The Save dialog box displays.

                                7        Type a log file name followed by a .log extension.

                                8        Click Save.



                                                                                         (Continued on next page)




January 2004
54          Recalling Events Using Host Software         Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




 Accessing the    Complete the following procedure to access the events log file.
Events Log File
                      Step                                     Action

                        1       Access the Cart Host software.
                                Reference
                                For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                Software on page 42.

                        2       From the File menu, select Open>Log File.
                                System Response
                                The Cart Host software displays the Open dialog box.

                        3       Select or navigate to the events log file.
                                Note
                                An events log file contains a .log extension. The default file
                                location is: C:Program FilesArtromickAvaloHost

                        4       Click Open.
                                System Response
                                The Cart Host software displays the events log file.




   Updating an    Complete the following procedure to update an events log file.
Events Log File

                      Step                                     Action

                        1       Connect to the cart.
                                Reference
                                For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                Software to the Cart on page 43.

                        2       Access the Cart Host software.
                                Reference
                                For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                Software on page 42.
                                                                                (Continued on next page)




                                                                                              January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software            Recalling Events Using Host Software              55




                             (Contd)
                              Step                                     Action

                                3        Open the events log file.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Events Log
                                         File on page 54.

                                4        Click Read Cart.
                                         System Response
                                         The Cart Host software reads the events from the cart and
                                         updates the log file.

                                5        From the File menu, select Save.
                                         System Response
                                         The Save dialog box displays.

                                6        Select the name of the existing log file or type a new log file name
                                         followed by a .log extension.

                                7        Click Save.




   Sorting Events         By default, log file events are arranged numerically according to the order in which
                          they occurred on the cart. The lowest number in the Num column of the log file
                          indicates the oldest event; the highest number indicates the most recent event.

                          The column headings on the log file are interactive to enable you to sort by
                          category.

                          For example, to sort by date, double-click the Date column heading on the log file.
                          The Cart Host software rearranges the log file so that all events that occurred on
                          the cart display according to the date.




January 2004
56            Managing Cart Settings                       Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




Managing Cart Settings


     Introduction   Your cart’s settings are configured based on your organization’s requirements and
                    the preconfigured setup of your cart.

                    The Cart Host software’s cart settings file provides an easy way for you to modify
                    these settings as the needs of your organization change or to better fit your
                    working environment. For example, if you work in an environment of high activity
                    in which the cart is frequently bumped or moved, you can modify the Mtn Detector
                    (Motion Detector) field on the cart settings file to decrease the cart’s level of
                    sensitivity. If you work in an area that requires high security, you may want to
                    adjust the Alarm/Beeper Level field on the cart settings file to a higher auditory
                    level, and so forth.

                    Before you modify the cart settings file, it is important to use the Read Cart
                    functionality to ensure that you are viewing the cart’s current settings. After you
                    modify the cart settings file, it is important to use the Write Cart functionality to
                    ensure that the system applies the changes you made to the cart.




 Managing User      You can configure your cart user codes two ways: General and Specific. The
 Access Codes       setting for user codes displays in the User Codes section of the cart settings page,
                    where the Type drop-down list contains the General and Specific options.

                    A General configuration means that your cart is configured for use with one
                    access code. Therefore, if more than one user is accessing the cart using the
                    code, you cannot track individual activity.

                    A Specific configuration means that your cart is configured to have multiple
                    access codes. Each user must be assigned a unique (specific) access profile so
                    that you can track individual user activity using the Cart Host software log file.

                                                                                     (Continued on next page)




                                                                                                January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                         Managing Cart Settings              57




                          If you have the optional eNarc accessory, the configuration defined in the Type
                          drop-down list affects what settings display in the Narcotics section of the user
                          interface.
                              If the Type field in the User Codes section is set to General, the Code Type
                              field in the Narcotics section must also be General, unless the cart is
                              equipped with the access card accessory.
                              If the Type field in the User Codes section is set to Specific, the Code Type
                              field in the Narcotics section can be set to either General or Specific,
                              depending on your needs.
                          Note
                          The cart saves all settings and user access profiles that are used with
                          Specific configurations. Therefore, as your needs change, you can switch
                          between Specific and General configurations without having to re-enter
                          user profiles.




January 2004
58            Creating a Cart Settings File                   Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




Creating a Cart Settings File


      Introduction    A cart settings file (*.crt) contains all of the settings on the cart. This file contains
                      Read Cart and Write Cart functionality so that you can retrieve settings from the
                      cart or apply the setting changes that you make in the Cart Host software user
                      interface to the cart.




Cart Settings File    The following table describes the fields on the cart settings file.
          Defined     Note
                      When you open a new cart settings file, it contains blank fields. After you
                      press the Read Cart button, the Cart Host software populates the file with
                      settings from the cart.


                              Field Name                                   Definition

                                                           Cart Section

                       Serial No.                 Serial number assigned to the cart.
                                                  Note
                                                  You cannot modify this field.

                       HW/FW Rev                  Hardware/firmware version or revision.
                                                  Note
                                                  You cannot modify this field.

                       Users/Events               Users and events currently in the cart.
                                                  Note
                                                  You cannot modify this field.

                       Name                       Name of the cart.

                       Number                     Number assigned to the cart.

                                                         Time/Date Section

                       Cart                       The time and date that display on the cart. The Read
                                                  Time button reads the cart’s current time and date.
                                                                                        (Continued on next page)




                                                                                                      January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                Creating a Cart Settings File                59




                                   (Contd)
                                 Field Name                            Definition

                           PC                  The time and date on the PC or laptop that is
                                               connected to the cart. The Set Time button enables
                                               you to type the current time and/or date and then set
                                               them.

                                                   Auto Secure Section

                           Delay               Controls the cart’s auto secure delay setting, which is
                                               the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse
                                               before the cart secures itself. This setting can be from
                                               1 minute to 99 minutes.

                           Mtn Detector        Controls the cart’s auto-relock motion detector
                                               sensitivity. The default setting is 5 (level 5). Available
                                               settings are Off and the range of 1 to 10. Level 10 is
                                               the most sensitive.

                                                 Personal Editing Section

                           Allowed             Controls whether users can change their own access
                                               codes. Available options are No and Yes.
                                               Warning
                                               If a user with personal editing capabilities selects
                                               an access code that is already in use, the cart’s
                                               LCD displays a CODE NOT AVAILABLE
                                               message, which could potentially compromise
                                               the security of your medication cart. To eliminate
                                               this possibility, do not allow personal editing.

                                                    Cart Codes Section

                           Cart Master         Master code assigned to the cart. This code must be a
                                               four-digit number.

                           Cart Override       This field displays the Override Code. The Override
                                               Code is a four-digit code assigned to the cart. The
                                               code bypasses alarms, timers, and relocking
                                               mechanisms. Typically, this function is used while the
                                               cart is being restocked in the pharmacy.
                                                                                    (Continued on next page)




January 2004
60   Creating a Cart Settings File                 Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




                     (Contd)
                   Field Name                                 Definition

                                          Light Timeout Section
                                 Note: This setting only applies to the
                                    optional night light accessory.

             Minutes                   Number of minutes the cart’s optional night light stays
                                       on after the cart secures. The default number of
                                       minutes is 1. Available settings are 1 to 99 minutes.

                                           Alarm/Beeper Section

             Level                     Controls the tone of your cart’s beeper. The default
                                       beeper level is Med (medium). Available levels are:
                                       Off, Low, Med, and High.

             Alarm Enable              Controls the alarm on the cart. A selected check box
                                       indicates that the alarm is on.

             Narc 1 Alarm              Controls the cart’s eNarc alarm setting on narcotics
                                       drawer 1. A selected check box indicates that the alarm
             Note
                                       is on.
             This setting
             only applies to
             users who have
             the eNarc
             optional
             accessory.

             Narc 2 Alarm              Controls the cart’s eNarc alarm setting on narcotics
                                       drawer 2. A selected check box indicates that the alarm
             Note
                                       is on.
             This setting
             only applies to
             users who have
             the eNarc
             optional
             accessory with
             two drawers.

             Key Beep                  Indicates whether the cart emits beeps when a user
                                       presses keys on the keypad. A selected check box
                                       indicates that the alarm is on.


                                                                           (Continued on next page)




                                                                                         January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                       Creating a Cart Settings File               61




                                    (Contd)
                                  Field Name                                 Definition

                                                            User Code Section

                           Type                       Controls the type of user access code that the cart
                                                      requires. Available settings are General or Specific.
                                                      General means that the cart is configured for only one
                                                      code. Therefore, if more than one user is accessing the
                                                      cart using a single code, individual activity cannot be
                                                      tracked. Specific means that the cart is configured for
                                                      use by multiple users or groups. When Specific is
                                                      selected, you must add users and assign each a
                                                      unique four-digit access code.

                                                      If you have the optional eNarc accessory, the Type
                                                      setting affects which options display in the Code Type
                                                      drop-down list in the Narcotics section.

                           General Code               Controls the general access code required to access
                                                      the cart. If Specific is selected from the Type drop-
                                                      down list, this field is not available.

                           Always Required            Indicates whether an access code is also required
                                                      when using the access card accessory. A selected
                                                      check box indicates that a user must use an access
                                                      code in addition to the access card accessory. A
                                                      cleared check box indicates that the user does not
                                                      need to use an access code when using the access
                                                      card accessory. This check box is used in conjunction
                                                      with the Custom Port check box. If None is selected in
                                                      the Custom Port check box, the Always Required
                                                      check box is not available.

                                                            Narcotics Section
                                               Note: These settings only apply to users
                                               who have the eNarc optional accessory.

                           Num Drawers                Controls which eNarc drawers users can access.
                                                                                          (Continued on next page)




January 2004
62   Creating a Cart Settings File               Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




                     (Contd)
                   Field Name                                Definition

             Code Type               Controls the type of narcotics code that a user must
                                     enter to access eNarc drawers. Available options
                                     depend on the Type setting that you selected in the
                                     User Code section. If you selected General, you must
                                     use a General code type, unless the cart is equipped
                                     with the access card accessory. If you selected
                                     Specific, you can specify a code type that is General or
                                     Specific (each user is assigned a unique Narc Code).

             General Code            This field controls the general code required to access
                                     the eNarc. If Specific is selected from the Code Type
                                     drop-down list, this field is not available.

                                       Com Port Setup Section
              WARNING: Adjusting these settings could negatively impact your ability
               to access the Cart Host software and/or the cart. Do not adjust this
                   setting without first consulting Artromick Technical Support.

             Host Port               Controls the port that the cart uses with the Cart Host
                                     software. Click Setup to adjust the Baud Rate, Parity,
                                     Data Bit, and Stop Bit settings.
                                     WARNING
                                     Adjusting this setting could negatively impact
                                     your ability to access the Cart Host software and/
                                     or the cart. Do not adjust this setting without first
                                     consulting Artromick Technical Support.

             Printer Port            Controls the port that the cart uses to connect to a
                                     printer. Click Setup to adjust the Baud Rate, Parity,
                                     Data Bit, and Stop Bit settings.
                                     WARNING
                                     Adjusting this setting could negatively impact
                                     your ability to access the Cart Host software and/
                                     or the cart. Do not adjust this setting without first
                                     consulting Artromick Technical Support.
                                                                          (Continued on next page)




                                                                                        January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                Creating a Cart Settings File              63




                                   (Contd)
                                 Field Name                            Definition

                           Custom Port         Controls the port that the cart uses for the access card
                                               accessory. Click Setup to adjust the Baud Rate, Parity,
                                               Data Bit, and Stop Bit settings.
                                               WARNING
                                               Adjusting this setting could negatively impact
                                               your ability to access the Cart Host software and/
                                               or the cart. Do not adjust this setting without first
                                               consulting Artromick Technical Support.

                                                           Buttons

                           Read Cart           Instructs the software to read data from the cart and
                                               then populate the cart settings file with the cart’s data.
                                               Note
                                               You must be connected to the cart in order to use
                                               this functionality. For more information, see
                                               Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on
                                               page 43.

                           Write Cart          Instructs the software to write the cart settings you
                                               modified to the cart.
                                               Note
                                               You must be connected to the cart in order to use
                                               this functionality. For more information, see
                                               Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on
                                               page 43.

                           Close               Exits the Cart Settings file.




January 2004
64         Creating a Cart Settings File                Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




     Procedure    Complete the following procedure to create a new cart settings file.
                  Reference
                  For field and description information, see Cart Settings File Defined on page
                  58.


                      Step                                    Action

                        1       Connect to the cart.
                                Reference
                                For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                Software to the Cart on page 43.

                        2       Access the Cart Host software.
                                Reference
                                For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                Software on page 42.

                        3       From the File menu, select New.

                        4       Select Cart Settings.
                                System Response
                                The Cart Host software displays the Cart Settings New dialog
                                box.

                        5       Click Read Cart.
                                System Response
                                The Cart Host software reads the cart’s current settings and
                                then populates the new cart settings file based on those
                                settings.

                        6       Modify the settings as necessary.
                                Note
                                You are not able to modify dimmed fields or selections.

                        7       From the File menu, select Save.
                                System Response
                                The Cart Host software displays the Save As dialog box.

                        8       From the Save In drop-down list, navigate to the location where
                                you want to save the file.
                                                                               (Continued on next page)




                                                                                             January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                      Creating a Cart Settings File            65




                             (Contd)
                              Step                                      Action

                                9        Type the name of the cart settings file followed by a .crt extension.

                               10        Click Save.
                                         System Response
                                         The Host software saves the file.




January 2004
66         Accessing Cart Settings File                 Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




Accessing Cart Settings File


      Procedure    Complete the following procedure to access a cart settings file.

                      Step                                      Action

                        1       Access the Cart Host software.
                                Reference
                                For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                Software on page 42.

                        2       From the File menu, select Open>Cart Settings.
                                System Response
                                The Cart Host software displays the Open dialog box.

                        3       Select or navigate to the cart settings file.
                                Note
                                The default file location is C:Program
                                FilesArtromickAvaloHost
                                A cart setting file ends with a .crt extension.

                        4       Click Open.
                                System Response
                                The Cart Host software displays the cart settings file.




                                                                                             January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                            Reading Cart Settings           67




Reading Cart Settings


      Introduction        Before you modify cart settings using the Cart Host software, it is important to
                          make sure that the file you are working in is the most current. If updates have
                          been made to the cart, you must read information from the cart using the Read
                          Cart button that displays in the user file.




        Procedure         Complete the following procedure to read cart settings from the cart.

                              Step                                      Action

                                1        Connect to the cart.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                         Software to the Cart on page 43.

                                2        Access the Cart Host software.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                         Software on page 42.

                                3        Open the cart settings file.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing Cart Settings
                                         File on page 66.

                                4        Click Read Cart.
                                         System Response
                                         The Cart Host software updates cart settings file with the
                                         cart’s current settings.

                                5        From the File menu, select Save.




January 2004
68            Writing Cart Settings to the Cart              Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




Writing Cart Settings to the Cart


      Introduction    After you modify cart settings using the Cart Host software, it is important to
                      update the cart with the newly-modified settings. To do this, you apply the cart
                      settings to the cart using the Write Cart button that displays in the cart settings file.




       Procedure      Complete the following procedure to apply changes to the cart settings file to the
                      cart.

                          Step                                       Action

                            1       Connect to the cart.
                                    Reference
                                    For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                    Software to the Cart on page 43.

                            2       Access the Cart Host software.
                                    Reference
                                    For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                    Software on page 42.

                            3       Open the cart settings file.
                                    Reference
                                    For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing Cart Settings
                                    File on page 66.

                            4       Click Write Cart.
                                    System Response
                                    The Cart Host software displays the Write Cart dialog box,
                                    which asks you whether you want to write these settings to
                                    the cart.

                            5       Click Yes.
                                    System Response
                                    The Cart Host software applies changes made to the cart
                                    settings file to the cart.

                            6       From the File menu, select Save.




                                                                                                   January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                  Modifying a Cart Settings File             69




Modifying a Cart Settings File


      Introduction        You can use the Cart Host software to modify the settings that control how your
                          cart works.

                          These settings include:
                              Cart
                              Time/Date
                              Auto Secure
                              Personal Editing
                              Cart Codes
                              Light Timeout
                              Alarm/Beeper
                              User Codes
                              Narcotics
                              Com Port Setup
                          Note
                          Although using the Cart Host software is the recommended method, you
                          can also modify cart settings from the cart. For more information, see
                          Modifying Cart Settings on page 103.


                                                                                       (Continued on next page)




January 2004
70         Modifying a Cart Settings File                Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




     Procedure    Complete the following procedure to modify cart settings using the Cart Host
                  software.
                  Reference
                  For field and description information, see Cart Settings File Defined on page
                  58.
                  Note
                  You are not able to modify dimmed fields or selections.

                      Step                                     Action

                         1      Connect to the cart.
                                Reference
                                For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                Software to the Cart on page 43.

                         2      Access the Cart Host software.
                                Reference
                                For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                Software on page 42.

                         3      Open the cart settings file.
                                Reference
                                For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing Cart Settings
                                File on page 66.

                         4      Click Read Cart.
                                System Response
                                The cart settings file is updated with settings from the cart.

                         5      Modify the cart settings as appropriate.

                         6      From the File menu, select Save.

                         7      Click Close.




                                                                                             January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                            Managing Cart Users                71




Managing Cart Users


      Introduction        With regard to user access settings, your cart is configured in one of two ways
                          based on your organization’s requirements and the preconfigured setup of your
                          cart.

                          A General configuration means that your cart is configured for use with one
                          access code. Therefore, if more than one user is accessing the cart using the
                          code, you cannot track individual activity. Your Cart Host software includes a
                          default user file with General user access settings that you can modify as needed.

                          A Specific configuration means that your cart is configured to have multiple
                          access codes. This enables you to track individual users or groups using the Cart
                          Host software log file.
                          Note
                          The type of configuration that your cart uses is specified in the Type drop-
                          down list in the User Codes section of the Cart Settings file. For more
                          information, see Cart Settings File Defined on page 58.

                          The Cart Host software’s user file provides an easy way for you to manage user
                          access settings, regardless of your cart’s configuration.
                          From the file, you can also apply changes that you make to the cart.




       Managing           To manage General user access using the Cart Host software:
     General User             Read the cart to ensure that you are viewing the most current user
          Access              information.
                              Reference
                              For more information, see Reading User Information on page 80.
                              Modify the settings associated with your default user access profile as
                              needed.
                              Reference
                              For more information, see Modifying a User Profile on page 89.
                              Apply changes to the cart.
                              Reference
                              For more information, see Writing Users to the Cart on page 81.


                                                                                         (Continued on next page)




January 2004
72           Managing Cart Users                         Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




      Managing      To manage Specific user access using the Cart Host software:
   Specific User        Create a user file.
         Access
                        Reference
                        For more information, see Creating a User File on page 73.
                        Read the cart to ensure that you are viewing the most current user
                        information.
                        Reference
                        For more information, see Reading User Information on page 80.
                        Add user profiles as necessary.
                        Reference
                        For more information, see Adding a Group of Users on page 82 or
                        Adding a New User on page 85.
                        Modify users as necessary.
                        Reference
                        For more information, see Modifying a User Profile on page 89.
                        Delete users as necessary.
                        Reference
                        For more information, see Deleting a User on page 93.
                        Apply changes to the cart.
                        Reference
                        For more information, see Writing Users to the Cart on page 81.




 Managing Users     If your organization uses multiple carts that are configured for use with Specific
on Multiple Carts   access codes, you can manage all users from a master user file.

                    In addition, you can use the Active check box that displays on the Add User or
                    Edit User dialog boxes to control which users are written to a specific cart. A
                    selected Active check box means that the user will be written to the cart. A cleared
                    check box means that the user will not be written to the cart.

                    The results of your selections display in the Active column of the user file. A Yes
                    value in the Active column means that when you write to the cart, the user will be
                    added to the cart. A No value in the column means that when you write to the cart,
                    the user will not be added to the cart.
                    Note
                    If you add a group of users they will, by default, display on the user file as
                    Active. You can modify the user’s status using the Edit User dialog box. For
                    more information, see Modifying a User Profile on page 89.

                                                                                              January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                               Creating a User File                73




Creating a User File


      Introduction        A user file (*.usr) contains a list of cart user profiles. This file contains Read Cart
                          and Write Cart functionality so that you can retrieve user profiles from the cart or
                          apply the changes that you make to the cart.




User File Defined         The following table describes the fields on the user file.
                          Note
                          When you open a new user file, it contains blank fields. After you press the
                          Read Cart button, the Cart Host software populates the file with user
                          profiles from the cart. In addition, profiles that you enter using the Add
                          Group or Add User dialog boxes also display here.


                                    Field                                    Definition

                           ID                       A unique, four-digit ID that identifies the cart user. You
                                                    cannot modify this ID. If you need to use the ID again,
                                                    you must delete the user.Typical IDs include the last
                                                    four digits of the user’s Social Security Number or the
                                                    user’s employee number.
                                                    Note
                                                    If programming user access settings from the cart,
                                                    this ID is referred to as the User #.

                           Name                     Name of the user. Typically, this is entered as the initial
                                                    of the user’s first name and his or her last name. This
                                                    field can contain a maximum of 16 characters.

                           Type                     User Type. A User Type defines basic levels of user
                                                    access. User Types include:
                                                             Normal: This User Type enables a user to
                                                             access specific areas of the cart. This person
                                                             cannot perform programming or recall functions.
                                                             This is the default setting.
                                                             Admin: This User Type enables a user to
                                                             perform all programming and Recall Event
                                                             functions and to access all areas of the cart.
                                                                                          (Continued on next page)




January 2004
74   Creating a User File                   Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




                    (Contd)
                     Field                            Definition

             Access Code       A unique, four-digit PIN that enables a user to access
                               the cart. The access code can be modified. By default,
                               the Cart Host software automatically populates this field,
                               which you can modify when you add or update the user.

             Override          If set to YES, this setting grants users the right to use
                               the Override Code. The Override Code is a four-digit
                               code assigned to the cart. The code bypasses alarms,
                               timers, and relocking mechanisms. Typically, this
                               function is used while the cart is being restocked in the
                               pharmacy. Available CART OVERRIDE options are NO
                               or YES.

             Narc Access       The eNarc drawers to which the user has been granted
                               access. Settings include:
                                   NONE
             Note
             This setting          DRW 1
             only applies to       DRW 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration)
             users who
                                   DRW 1& 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration)
             have the
             eNarc optional    Note
             accessory.        The location of the eNarc drawers depends on the
                               configuration of your cart.

             Narc Code         A four-digit PIN that enables a user to access the eNarc
                               drawers. By default, the Cart Host software
                               automatically populates this field, which you can modify
                               when you add or update the user.
                               Note
                               The Narc Access setting only applies if the cart is
                               configured with the eNarc optional accessory.

             Extended ID       Code assigned to the user’s access card.
             Note
             This setting
             only applies to
             users who
             have the
             access card
             optional
             accessory.
                                                                   (Continued on next page)




                                                                                 January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                         Creating a User File               75




                                   (Contd)
                                    Field                             Definition

                           Access Code         A unique, four-digit PIN that enables a user to access
                                               the cart. The access code can be modified. By default,
                                               the Cart Host software automatically populates this field,
                                               which you can modify when you add or update the user.

                           Override            If set to YES, this setting grants users the right to use
                                               the Override Code. The Override Code is a four-digit
                                               code assigned to the cart. The code bypasses alarms,
                                               timers, and relocking mechanisms. Typically, this
                                               function is used while the cart is being restocked in the
                                               pharmacy. Available CART OVERRIDE options are NO
                                               or YES.

                           Narc Access         The eNarc drawers to which the user has been granted
                                               access. Settings include:
                                                   NONE
                           Note
                           This setting            DRW 1
                           only applies to         DRW 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration)
                           users who
                                                   DRW 1& 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration)
                           have the
                           eNarc optional      Note
                           accessory.          The location of the eNarc drawers depends on the
                                               configuration of your cart.

                           Narc Code           A four-digit PIN that enables a user to access the eNarc
                                               drawers. By default, the Cart Host software
                                               automatically populates this field, which you can modify
                                               when you add or update the user.
                                               Note
                                               The Narc Access setting only applies if the cart is
                                               configured with the eNarc optional accessory.

                           Extended ID         Code assigned to the user’s access card.
                           Note
                           This setting
                           only applies to
                           users who
                           have the
                           access card
                           optional
                           accessory.
                                                                                   (Continued on next page)




January 2004
76   Creating a User File                   Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




                    (Contd)
                     Field                            Definition

             Access Code       A unique, four-digit PIN that enables a user to access
                               the cart. The access code can be modified. By default,
                               the Cart Host software automatically populates this field,
                               which you can modify when you add or update the user.

             Override          If set to YES, this setting grants users the right to use
                               the Override Code. The Override Code is a four-digit
                               code assigned to the cart. The code bypasses alarms,
                               timers, and relocking mechanisms. Typically, this
                               function is used while the cart is being restocked in the
                               pharmacy. Available CART OVERRIDE options are NO
                               or YES.

             Narc Access       The eNarc drawers to which the user has been granted
                               access. Settings include:
                                   NONE
             Note
             This setting          DRW 1
             only applies to       DRW 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration)
             users who
                                   DRW 1& 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration)
             have the
             eNarc optional    Note
             accessory.        The location of the eNarc drawers depends on the
                               configuration of your cart.

             Narc Code         A four-digit PIN that enables a user to access the eNarc
                               drawers. By default, the Cart Host software
                               automatically populates this field, which you can modify
                               when you add or update the user.
                               Note
                               The Narc Access setting only applies if the cart is
                               configured with the eNarc optional accessory.

             Extended ID       Code assigned to the user’s access card.
             Note
             This setting
             only applies to
             users who
             have the
             access card
             optional
             accessory.
                                                                   (Continued on next page)




                                                                                 January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                          Creating a User File             77




                                    (Contd)
                                     Field                             Definition

                           Active              Indicates whether the user can be written to the cart.
                                               Yes means that when you write to the cart, the user will
                                               be added to the cart. No means that when you write to
                                               the cart, the user will not be added to the cart.
                                               Note
                                               You can use this feature to manage users on
                                               multiple carts. For more information, see
                                               Managing Users on Multiple Carts on page 72.

                           Read Cart           Instructs the software to read the user information that is
                                               currently stored on the cart. Use of this feature ensures
                                               that your user file contains the same information as the
                                               cart.
                                               Note
                                               You must be connected to the cart in order to use
                                               this functionality. For more information, see
                                               Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page
                                               43.

                           Write Cart          This button enables you to write changes that you make
                                               in the user file to the cart. Use of this feature ensures
                                               that your user file contains the same information as the
                                               cart.
                                               Note
                                               You must be connected to the cart in order to use
                                               this functionality. For more information, see
                                               Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page
                                               43.

                           Add Group           This button displays the Add Group dialog box, which
                                               enables you to add multiple users simultaneously.

                           Add User            This button displays the Add User dialog box, which
                                               enables you to add a new user to the user file.

                           Delete User         This button displays the Delete User dialog box, which
                                               enables you to delete a selected user.

                           Close               This button closes the user file.
                                               Note
                                               If the user file contains unsaved changes, the Cart
                                               Host software prompts you to save the file before
                                               the software closes.



January 2004
78         Creating a User File                           Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




     Procedure    Complete the following procedure to create a new user file.

                      Step                                      Action

                        1         Connect to the cart.
                                  Reference
                                  For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                  Software to the Cart on page 43.

                        2         Access the Cart Host software.
                                  Reference
                                  For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                  Software on page 42.

                        3         From the File menu, select New.

                        4         Select User File.
                                  System Response
                                  The Cart Host software displays a blank user file.

                        5         Click Read Cart.
                                  System Response
                                  The Cart Host software reads the cart’s current user profiles
                                  and then populates the new user file based on those
                                  settings.

                        6         From the File menu, select Save.
                                  System Response
                                  The Cart Host software displays the Save As dialog box.

                        7         From the Save In drop-down list, navigate to the location where
                                  you want to save the file.

                        8         Type the name of the user file followed by a .usr extension.

                        9         Click Save.
                                  System Response
                                  The Cart Host software saves the file.




                                                                                              January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                              Accessing a User File   79




Accessing a User File


        Procedure         Complete the following procedure to access a user file.

                              Step                                       Action

                                1        Access the Cart Host software.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                         Software on page 42.

                                2        From the File menu, select Open>User File.
                                         System Response
                                         The Cart Host software displays the Open dialog box.

                                3        Select or navigate to the user file.
                                         Note
                                         The default file location is:
                                         C:Program FilesArtromickAvaloHost
                                         A user file contains a .usr extension.

                                4        Click Open.
                                         System Response
                                         The Cart Host software displays the user file.




January 2004
80            Reading User Information                    Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




Reading User Information


     Introduction   Before you add or modify user profiles using the Cart Host software, it is important
                    that the file you are working from is the most current. If updates have been made
                    to the cart, you must read information from the cart using the Read Cart button
                    that displays in the user file.




      Procedure     Complete the following procedure to read user information from the cart.

                        Step                                    Action

                          1      Connect to the cart.
                                 Reference
                                 For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                 Software to the Cart on page 43.

                          2      Access the Cart Host software.
                                 Reference
                                 For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                 Software on page 42.

                          3      Open the user file.
                                 Reference
                                 For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing a User File on
                                 page 79.

                          4      Click Read Cart.
                                 System Response
                                 The Cart Host software displays the Read Cart dialog box
                                 asking you whether you want to replace all users in the
                                 current data base.

                          5      Click Yes.
                                 System Response
                                 The Cart Host software updates user file with the cart’s
                                 current user profiles.

                          6      From the File menu, select Save.




                                                                                              January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                         Writing Users to the Cart           81




Writing Users to the Cart


      Introduction        After you add or modify user profiles using the Cart Host software, it is important
                          to update the cart to include the users that you added or modified. To do this, you
                          apply the user information to the cart using the Write Cart button that displays in
                          the user file.




        Procedure         Complete the following procedure to write user information to the cart.

                              Step                                     Action

                                1        Connect to the cart.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                         Software to the Cart on page 43.

                                2        Access the Cart Host software.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                         Software on page 42.

                                3        Click Write Cart.
                                         System Response
                                         The Cart Host software displays the Write Cart dialog box
                                         asking you whether you want to replace all users in the cart.

                                4        Click Yes.
                                         System Response
                                         The Cart Host software applies changes made to the user file
                                         to the cart.

                                5        From the File menu, select Save.




January 2004
82            Adding a Group of Users                     Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




Adding a Group of Users


      Introduction   The Add Group button on the user file enables you to add a large number of cart
                     users simultaneously. When you add a group of users, you select a Start ID and
                     an End ID range for the group. By default, the Cart Host software automatically
                     populates these fields, which you can modify with IDs that are not in use.
                     However, after you click OK on the dialog box, the IDs cannot be modified. The
                     settings that you assign on the Add Group dialog box apply to all users in the
                     group. After you create the group, its members display individually on the user file.




      Add Group      The following table describes the Add Group dialog box.
      Dialog Box     Note
Settings Defined     These settings display when you click the Add Group button in the user
                     file.


                                   Field                                   Definition

                       Start ID                         A unique, four-digit ID that applies to the first
                                                        user in the group that you are creating. By
                                                        default, the Cart Host software automatically
                                                        populates this field, which you can modify with
                                                        an ID that is not in use. After you click OK on
                                                        this dialog box, the ID field cannot be modified.
                                                        However, if you need to use the ID again, you
                                                        can delete the user.

                       End ID                           A unique, four-digit ID that applies to the last
                                                        user in the group that you are creating. By
                                                        default, the Cart Host software automatically
                                                        populates this field, which you can modify with
                                                        an ID that is not in use. After you click OK on
                                                        this dialog box, the ID field cannot be modified.
                                                        However, if you need to use the ID again, you
                                                        can delete the user.
                                                                                  (Continued on next page)




                                                                                                January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software              Adding a Group of Users               83




                                        (Contd)
                                         Field                       Definition

                            User Type              A User Type defines basic levels of user
                                                   access. User Types include:
                                                           Normal: This User Type enables a
                                                           user to access specific areas of the
                                                           cart. This person cannot perform
                                                           programming or recall functions. This
                                                           is the default setting.
                                                           Admin: This User Type enables a
                                                           user to perform all programming and
                                                           Recall Event functions and to access
                                                           all areas of the cart.

                            Narc Access            Controls eNarc drawer access options for a
                                                   group of users. Settings include:
                                                       NONE
                            Note
                            This setting only          DRW 1
                            applies to users who       DRW 2 (if applicable to the cart’s
                            have the eNarc             configuration)
                            optional accessory.
                                                       DRW 1& 2 (if applicable to the cart’s
                                                       configuration)
                                                   Note
                                                   The location of the eNarc drawers
                                                   depends on the configuration of your
                                                   cart.

                            Cancel                 Cancels the Add Group function.

                            OK                     Saves the information that you typed and
                                                   closes the Add Group dialog box.




January 2004
84         Adding a Group of Users                    Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




     Procedure   Complete the following procedure to add a group of users using the Cart Host
                 software.
                 Reference
                 For field and description information, see Add Group Dialog Box Settings
                 Defined on page 82.

                     Step                                    Action

                      1       Connect to the cart.
                              Reference
                              For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                              Software to the Cart on page 43.

                      2       Access the Cart Host software.
                              Reference
                              For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                              Software on page 42.

                      3       Open the user file.
                              Reference
                              For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing a User File on
                              page 79.

                      4       Click Add Group.
                              System Response
                              The Cart Host software displays the Add Users dialog box.

                      5       Type the Start ID and the End ID for the range of users that you
                              want to include in this group.

                      6       Modify the User Type and access settings as appropriate.

                      7       Click OK.
                              System Response
                              The Cart Host software updates the user file to include the
                              new users based on the ID range that you specified.

                      8       From the File menu, select Save.
                              Important
                              It is important that the information contained in the Cart Host
                              software user file is the same information that is stored on
                              the cart (and vice versa). Therefore, you should apply
                              changes that you make to the cart. For more information, see
                              Writing Users to the Cart on page 81.



                                                                                          January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                             Adding a New User                 85




Adding a New User


      Introduction        The Add User button on the user file enables you to add one user at a time to the
                          file. After you add a user, the user displays on the user file.




       Add User           The following table describes the fields on the Add User dialog box.
      Dialog Box          Note
Settings Defined          These settings display when you click the Add User button in the user file.


                                         Field                                Definition

                            ID                             A unique, four-digit ID that identifies the cart
                                                           user. By default, the Cart Host software
                                                           automatically populates this field, which you
                                                           can modify with an ID that is not in use.
                                                           However, after you click OK on the dialog box,
                                                           you cannot modify the ID. If you need to use
                                                           the ID again, you must delete the user. Typical
                                                           IDs include the last four digits of the user’s
                                                           Social Security Number or the user’s employee
                                                           number.
                                                           Note
                                                           If programming user access settings
                                                           from the cart, this ID is referred to as the
                                                           User #.

                            Active                         Indicates whether the user can be written to
                                                           the cart. A selected check box means that
                                                           when you write to the cart, the user will be
                                                           added to the cart. A cleared check box means
                                                           that when you write to the cart, the user will not
                                                           be added to the cart.
                                                           Note
                                                           You can use this check box to manage
                                                           users on multiple carts. For more
                                                           information, see Managing Users on
                                                           Multiple Carts on page 72.
                                                                                      (Continued on next page)




January 2004
86   Adding a New User                Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




                         (Contd)
                          Field                        Definition

            Name                   Name of the user. Typically, this is entered as
                                   the initial of the user’s first name and his or her
                                   last name. This field can contain a maximum of
                                   16 characters.

            Override               A selected check box grants users the right to
                                   use the Override Code. The Override Code is
                                   a four-digit code that is assigned to the cart.
                                   The code bypasses alarms, timers, and
                                   relocking mechanisms. Typically, this function
                                   is used while the cart is being restocked in the
                                   pharmacy.

            User Type              Defines basic levels of user access. User
                                   Types include:
                                           Normal: This User Type enables a
                                           user to access specific areas of the
                                           cart. This person cannot perform
                                           programming or recall functions. This
                                           is the default setting.
                                           Admin: This User Type enables a
                                           user to perform all programming and
                                           Recall Event functions and to access
                                           all areas of the cart.

            Access Code            A unique, four-digit PIN that enables a user to
                                   access the cart. By default, the Cart Host
                                   software automatically populates this field,
                                   which you can modify to meet your needs.

            Narc Access            Controls eNarc drawer access options that you
                                   can grant to a user. Settings include:
                                       NONE
            Note
            This setting only          DRW 1
            applies to users who       DRW 2 (if applicable to the cart’s
            have the eNarc             configuration)
            optional accessory.
                                       DRW 1& 2 (if applicable to the cart’s
                                       configuration)
                                   Note
                                   The location of the eNarc drawers depends on
                                   the configuration of your cart.



                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                                 Adding a New User                87




                                        (Contd)
                                         Field                                    Definition

                            Narc Code                           A four-digit PIN that enables a user to access
                                                                the eNarc drawers. By default, the Cart Host
                                                                software automatically populates this field,
                                                                which you can modify to meet your needs.
                                                                Note
                                                                The Narc Access setting only applies if
                                                                the cart is configured with the eNarc
                                                                optional accessory.

                            Extended ID                         Code assigned to the user’s access card.
                            Note
                            This setting only
                            applies to users who
                            have the access card
                            optional accessory.

                            OK                                  Saves the information that you typed and
                                                                closes the Add User dialog box.




        Procedure         Complete the following procedure to add a new user to a user file.
                          Reference
                          For field and description information, see Add User Dialog Box Settings
                          Defined on page 85.


                              Step                                       Action

                                 1       Connect to the cart.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                         Software to the Cart on page 43.

                                 2       Access the Cart Host software.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                         Software on page 42.
                                                                                         (Continued on next page)




January 2004
88   Adding a New User                           Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




             (Contd)
              Step                                      Action

                3        Open the user file.
                         Reference
                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing a User File on
                         page 79.

                4        Read the cart.
                         Reference
                         For step-by-step instructions, see Reading User Information
                         on page 80.

                5        Click Add User.
                         System Response
                         The Add User dialog box displays.

                6        Type the appropriate user information.

                7        Click OK.
                         System Response
                         The Add User dialog box closes and the user file displays
                         with the user added to the file.
                         Important
                         It is important that the information contained in the Cart Host
                         software user file is the same information that is stored on
                         the cart (and vice versa). Therefore, you should apply
                         changes that you make to the cart. For more information, see
                         Writing Users to the Cart on page 81.




                                                                                     January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                         Modifying a User Profile              89




Modifying a User Profile


      Introduction        This section describes how to modify user access settings, including:
                              Access code settings
                              eNarc access code settings (if applicable)




     Modifying A          Complete the following procedure to modify a user’s access settings using the
   User’s Access          Cart Host software.
         Settings         Note
                          You are not able to modify dimmed fields or selections.
                          Reference
                          For field and description information, see User File Defined on page 73.


                              Step                                    Action

                                 1       Connect to the cart.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                         Software to the Cart on page 43.

                                 2       Access the Cart Host software.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                         Software on page 42.

                                 3       Open the user file.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing a User File on
                                         page 79.

                                 4       Read the cart.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Reading User Information
                                         on page 80.
                                                                                      (Continued on next page)




January 2004
90   Modifying a User Profile                     Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




              (Contd)
               Step                                      Action

                 5        Double-click the appropriate user whose access settings you want
                          to modify.
                          System Response
                          The Cart Host software displays the Edit User dialog box.

                 6        Modify the access settings as appropriate.

                 7        Click OK.
                          System Response
                          The Edit User dialog box closes and the user file displays
                          with the modified user.

                 8        From the File menu, select Save.
                          Important
                          It is important that the information contained in the Cart Host
                          software user file is the same information that is stored on
                          the cart (and vice versa). Therefore, you should apply
                          changes that you make to the cart. For more information, see
                          Writing Users to the Cart on page 81.



                                                                            (Continued on next page)




                                                                                       January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                         Modifying a User Profile              91




      Modifying a         Complete the following procedure to modify a user’s eNarc access using the Cart
     User’s eNarc         Host software.
     Access Code          Note
         Settings         You are not able to modify dimmed fields or selections.
                          Reference
                          For field and description information, see User File Defined on page 73.


                              Step                                    Action

                                 1       Connect to the cart.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                         Software to the Cart on page 43.

                                 2       Access the Cart Host software.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                         Software on page 42.

                                 3       Open the user file.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing a User File on
                                         page 79.

                                 4       Read the cart.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Reading User Information
                                         on page 80.

                                 5       Double-click the appropriate user whose eNarc settings you want
                                         to modify.
                                         System Response
                                         The Edit User dialog box displays.

                                 6       Modify the Narc Access and/or Narc Code settings as appropriate.
                                                                                      (Continued on next page)




January 2004
92   Modifying a User Profile                     Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




              (Contd)
               Step                                      Action

                 7        Click OK.
                          System Response
                          The Edit User dialog box closes and the user file displays
                          with the modified user.

                 8        From the File menu, select Save.
                          Important
                          It is important that the information contained in the Cart Host
                          software user file is the same information that is stored on
                          the cart (and vice versa). Therefore, you should apply
                          changes that you make to the cart. For more information, see
                          Writing Users to the Cart on page 81.




                                                                                      January 2004
Programming the Cart Using the Host Software                                     Deleting a User              93




Deleting a User


      Introduction        If your cart requires Specific access codes, you can use the Cart Host software to
                          delete user profiles that you add to the cart.
                          Note
                          The type of configuration (General or Specific) that your cart uses is
                          specified in the Cart Host software cart settings file. For more information,
                          see Modifying a Cart Settings File on page 69.




        Procedure         Complete the following procedure to delete a user using the Cart Host software.


                              Step                                      Action

                                 1       Connect to the cart.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host
                                         Software to the Cart on page 43.

                                 2       Access the Cart Host software.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host
                                         Software on page 42.

                                 3       Open the user file.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing a User File on
                                         page 79.

                                 4       Read the cart.
                                         Reference
                                         For step-by-step instructions, see Reading User Information
                                         on page 80.

                                 5       Click to highlight the user that you want to delete.
                                                                                         (Continued on next page)




January 2004
94   Deleting a User                            Programming the Cart Using the Host Software




              (Contd)
               Step                                    Action

                 6      Click Delete User.
                        System Response
                        The Cart Host software displays a message asking you
                        whether you are sure you want to delete the user.

                 7      Click Yes.
                        System Response
                        The Cart Host software deletes the user from the user file.

                 8      From the File menu, select Save.
                        Important
                        It is important that the information contained in the Cart Host
                        software user file is the same information that is stored on
                        the cart (and vice versa). Therefore, you should apply
                        changes that you make to the cart. For more information, see
                        Writing Users to the Cart on page 81.




                                                                                    January 2004
-95
                                                                                                                       95



                                                                                                                       4
   Programming the Cart From the Cart
          Contents   Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
                               Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
                     Entering Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
                                Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
                                Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
                     Recalling Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
                                Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
                                General Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
                                Event Master List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
                                Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
                     Managing Cart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
                               Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
                               Managing Access Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
                               General Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
                     Modifying Cart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
                                Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
                                Cart Settings Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
                                Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
                     Managing Cart Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
                               Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
                               Managing GENERAL User Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
                               Managing SPECIFIC User Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
                               General Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
                     Adding a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
                               Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
                               User Access
                               Settings Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
                               Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
                     Modifying User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
                                Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
                                Modifying A User’s Code Access Settings . . . . . . . . 127
                                Modifying a User’s eNarc Access Code Settings . . . 129
                     Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
                                Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
                                Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131




January 2004
96                             Overview                            Programming the Cart From the Cart




Overview


     Introduction   The procedures in this chapter explain how to program the Avalo AC Medication
                    Cart from the cart.

                    This chapter contains the following topics:
                        Entering Programming Mode
                        Recalling Events
                        Managing Cart Settings
                        Managing Cart Users




                                                                                          January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                             Entering Programming Mode                 97




Entering Programming Mode


      Introduction        Programming Mode enables authorized users to:
                              Recall events (if applicable)
                              Modify user access
                              Modify cart settings
                          Note
                          Depending on your cart’s configuration, you must have a valid access code
                          and/or a valid access card, as well as the valid cart master code to access
                          the cart in Programming Mode.
                          Reference
                          See Terms and Definitions on page 9 for information about the different
                          types of access codes.




        Procedure         You must enter programming mode with the cart in an idle state. If the cart
                          is in use before you begin this procedure, secure the cart before beginning
                          the procedure.

                          Complete the following procedure to enter Programming Mode.


                              Step                                   Action

                                 1     Press Function.
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       PROGRAMMING MODE? 1-YES 1-NO
                                 2     Press 1 (YES).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       PLEASE ENTER ACCESS CODE
                                       or
                                       PLEASE SWIPE CARD
                                                                                    (Continued on next page)




January 2004
98             Entering Programming Mode             Programming the Cart From the Cart




     (Contd)
      Step                                     Action

       3        Do one of the following:
                    If your cart’s configuration requires an access code only:
                    Enter your access code. Go to the next step.
                    If your cart’s configuration requires an access card only:
                    Swipe your card. Go to the next step.
                    If your cart’s configuration requires an access code and an
                    access card: Enter your access card. Swipe your card. Go to
                    the next step.
                Note
                If you enter a code that is not assigned to an administrator,
                the system prompts you to re-enter the code or to re-swipe
                your card, as applicable. If you find that your code does not
                work, contact your supervisor.
                System Response
                The LCD displays the following message:
                PLEASE ENTER CART MASTER CODE
       4        Enter your cart’s master code.
                System Response
                The LCD displays the following message:
                1-RECALL EVENTS
                2-EDIT PROGRAM
                Note
                If your cart’s master code is not valid, the LCD prompts you
                to re-enter the code until the correct code is entered. If you
                find that your code does not work, contact your supervisor.




                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                         Recalling Events               99




Recalling Events


      Introduction        Recall Events Mode is an audit tracking system that enables authorized users to
                          review up to 4,000 of the past events starting with the most recent.

                          Recall Events Mode identifies users associated with the event and the time and
                          date of that event.

                          Recall Events Mode is a non-edit mode. To edit user access or cart settings, you
                          must exit Recall Events Mode and then proceed to Edit Program Mode. For more
                          information, see Adding a User on page 121 or Modifying Cart Settings on page
                          103.




          General         Recall Events Mode is set up in a hierarchical system that includes the following
        Navigation        main headings:
                              PRINT EVENTS
                              REVIEW EVENTS
                              EXIT RECALL

                          When viewing a main heading, press 2 (NO) to advance to the next main heading
                          in Recall Events Mode. Press 1 (YES) to advance further into a heading’s
                          subgroup.

                          When in the REVIEW EVENTS subgroup, use 5 and 8 on your keypad to scroll
                          forward or backward, respectively, through the events in the subgroup one event
                          at a time. Use 2 and 0 on your keypad to scroll forward or backward through five
                          events at a time.

                          To exit, press ESC one or more times to navigate to the EXIT RECALL main
                          heading, and press 1 (YES).




     Event Master         The Event Master List provides a detailed description of event-related codes that
             List         display on the LCD. You can use the Event Master List as a reference guide when
                          viewing events on the LCD.
                          Reference
                          For more information, see the appendix, "Event Master List," in this guide.


                                                                                        (Continued on next page)



January 2004
100                          Recalling Events                      Programming the Cart From the Cart




      Procedure   Complete the following procedure to recall events.

                  Note: To exit recall events, press ESC and then press 1 (YES).

                     Step                                    Action

                       1       Enter Programming Mode.
                               Reference
                               For step-by-step instructions, see Entering Programming
                               Mode on page 97.
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               1-RECALL EVENTS
                               2-EDIT PROGRAM
                       2       Press 1 (RECALL EVENTS).
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following:
                               REVIEW EVENTS?
                               1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                       3       Do you want to review events?
                                   If yes, press 1 (YES). Use the 5 (Forward) and 8 (Backward)
                                   keys on your keypad to scroll one event at a time or use the 2
                                   and 0 keys on your keypad to scroll through five events at a
                                   time. Press ESC to exit.
                                   If no, press 1 (NO).
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               EXIT RECALL?
                               1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                       4       Do you want to exit event recall?
                                   If yes, press 1 (YES).
                                   If no, press 1 (NO). Repeat the steps in this procedure as
                                   needed.
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               1-RECALL EVENTS
                               2-EDIT PROGRAM


                                                                                          January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                    Managing Cart Settings                101




Managing Cart Settings


      Introduction        Your cart’s settings are configured based on your organization’s requirements and
                          the preconfigured setup of your cart.

                          You can modify these settings as the needs of your organization change or to
                          better fit your working environment. For example, if you work in an environment of
                          high activity in which the cart is frequently bumped or moved, you may choose to
                          decrease the level of sensitivity on the cart’s motion detector (MTN DETECTOR).
                          If you work in an area that requires high security, you may want to adjust the cart’s
                          alarm to a higher auditory level, and so forth.




       Managing           The Access Code setting on your cart is configured as GENERAL or SPECIFIC.
   Access Codes
                          A GENERAL configuration means that your cart is configured for use with one
                          access code. Therefore, if more than one user is accessing the cart, you cannot
                          track individual activity.

                          A SPECIFIC configuration means that your cart is configured to have multiple
                          users or a group. Each user must be assigned a unique access profile so that you
                          can track individual user activity using the Event Recall functionality.

                          If you have the optional eNarc accessory, your Access Code configuration affects
                          which NARC CODE settings can be used:
                              If your Access Code is set to GENERAL, your NARC CODE setting must also
                              be GENERAL.
                              If your Access Code is set to SPECIFIC, your NARC CODE setting can be set
                              to either GENERAL or SPECIFIC depending on your needs.
                          Note
                          The cart saves all settings and user access profiles that are used with
                          SPECIFIC configurations. Therefore, as your needs change, you can switch
                          between SPECIFIC and GENERAL configurations without having to
                          re-enter user profiles.


                                                                                          (Continued on next page)




January 2004
102                            Managing Cart Settings                Programming the Cart From the Cart




        General    When you access the cart settings feature, the system displays all of the settings
      Navigation   in the LCD as a continuous list. To move through the list in order to view settings
                   and navigate to a specific setting, press 1 (ACCEPT) to advance in the list to the
                   next setting without changing the current setting. When you display the last setting
                   selection, press 1 (ACCEPT) to return to the beginning of the list. You can repeat
                   this process as many times as needed.
                   Reference
                   See Procedure on page 108 for the steps involved in changing the settings.




                                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                  Modifying Cart Settings              103




Modifying Cart Settings


      Introduction        You can modify the settings that control how your cart works. These settings
                          include:
                              Beeper Level
                              Alarm
                              Narc Alarm 1
                              Narc Alarm 2
                              Key Beep
                              Auto Secure
                              Motion Detector
                              Access Code
                              Narc Code
                              Cart Master Code
                              Personal Editing
                              Time
                              Date
                              Light on Time Interval
                              Custom Port
                          Reference
                          See Cart Settings Defined on page 103 for a complete description of the
                          settings.




     Cart Settings        The following table describes the user access settings that you can define or
          Defined         modify.


                                     Setting Name                             Definition

                           BEEPER LEVEL                    This setting controls the tone of your cart’s
                                                           beeper. The default beeper level is MEDIUM.
                                                           Available levels are: OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, and
                                                           HIGH.
                                                                                     (Continued on next page)




January 2004
104           Modifying Cart Settings               Programming the Cart From the Cart




              (Contd)
           Setting Name                               Definition

      ALARM                         This setting controls the alarm on the cart. The
                                    default setting is ALARM ON. Available
                                    settings are: ALARM ON or ALARM OFF.

      NARC 1 ALARM                  This setting controls the cart’s eNarc
                                    (Electronic Keyless Narcotic Storage) alarm
                                    setting on narcotics drawer 1. This is an
                                    optional accessory. The default setting is
                                    NARC 1 ALARM ON. Available settings are:
                                    NARC 1 ALARM ON or NARC 1 ALARM OFF.

      NARC 2 ALARM                  This setting controls the cart’s eNarc alarm
                                    setting on narcotics drawer 2. This is an
                                    optional accessory. The default setting is
                                    NARC 2 ALARM ON. Available settings are:
                                    NARC 2 ALARM ON or NARC 2 ALARM OFF.

      KEY BEEP                      This setting controls whether the cart emits
                                    beeps when a user presses keys on the
                                    keypad. The default setting is KEY BEEP ON.
                                    Available settings are: KEY BEEP ON and
                                    KEY BEEP OFF.

      AUTO SECURE                   This setting controls the cart’s auto secure
                                    delay setting, which is the number of minutes
                                    of inactivity that can elapse before the cart
                                    secures itself. Use the keypad to adjust this
                                    setting, which can be set from 01 minute to 99
                                    minutes. This number must be in a two-digit
                                    format. The default setting is 05 minutes.

      MTN DETECTOR                  This setting controls the cart’s auto-relock
                                    motion detector sensitivity. The default setting
                                    is LVL5 (level 5). Available settings are OFF
                                    and the range of LVL 1 to LVL 10. LVL10 is the
                                    most sensitive.
                                                              (Continued on next page)




                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                           Modifying Cart Settings             105




                                        (Contd)
                                     Setting Name                     Definition

                           ALARM                    This setting controls the alarm on the cart. The
                                                    default setting is ALARM ON. Available
                                                    settings are: ALARM ON or ALARM OFF.

                           NARC 1 ALARM             This setting controls the cart’s eNarc
                                                    (Electronic Keyless Narcotic Storage) alarm
                                                    setting on narcotics drawer 1. This is an
                                                    optional accessory. The default setting is
                                                    NARC 1 ALARM ON. Available settings are:
                                                    NARC 1 ALARM ON or NARC 1 ALARM OFF.

                           NARC 2 ALARM             This setting controls the cart’s eNarc alarm
                                                    setting on narcotics drawer 2. This is an
                                                    optional accessory. The default setting is
                                                    NARC 2 ALARM ON. Available settings are:
                                                    NARC 2 ALARM ON or NARC 2 ALARM OFF.

                           KEY BEEP                 This setting controls whether the cart emits
                                                    beeps when a user presses keys on the
                                                    keypad. The default setting is KEY BEEP ON.
                                                    Available settings are: KEY BEEP ON and
                                                    KEY BEEP OFF.

                           AUTO SECURE              This setting controls the cart’s auto secure
                                                    delay setting, which is the number of minutes
                                                    of inactivity that can elapse before the cart
                                                    secures itself. Use the keypad to adjust this
                                                    setting, which can be set from 01 minute to 99
                                                    minutes. This number must be in a two-digit
                                                    format. The default setting is 05 minutes.

                           MTN DETECTOR             This setting controls the cart’s auto-relock
                                                    motion detector sensitivity. The default setting
                                                    is LVL5 (level 5). Available settings are OFF
                                                    and the range of LVL 1 to LVL 10. LVL10 is the
                                                    most sensitive.
                                                                             (Continued on next page)




January 2004
106            Modifying Cart Settings               Programming the Cart From the Cart




                (Contd)
             Setting Name                              Definition

      ACCESS CODE                    This setting controls the type of user Access
                                     Code that the cart requires. Available settings
                                     are GENERAL or SPECIFIC. GENERAL
                                     means that the cart is configured for use with
                                     one access code. Therefore, if more than one
                                     user is accessing the cart, individual activity
                                     cannot be tracked. SPECIFIC means that the
                                     cart is configured for use by multiple users or
                                     groups. When the SPECIFIC is selected, you
                                     must add users and assign each a unique four-
                                     digit Access Code.

                                     If you have the optional eNarc accessory, the
                                     Access Code setting affects which NARC
                                     CODE options display.

      NARC CODE                      This setting controls the type of narcotics code
                                     that a user must enter to access eNarc
                                     drawers. Available options depend on which
                                     type of Access Code you select. If you select a
                                     GENERAL Access Code, you must use a
                                     GENERAL NARC CODE, unless the cart is
                                     equipped with the access card accessory. If
                                     you select a SPECIFIC Access Code, you can
                                     specify a NARC CODE that is GENERAL or
                                     SPECIFIC (each user is assigned a unique
                                     NARC CODE).

      CHG CART MASTER CODE           This setting enables an administrator to
                                     change the master code assigned to the cart.
                                     This code must be a four-digit number.

      PERSONAL EDITING               This setting controls whether non-administrator
                                     users can change their own access codes.

      TIME                           This setting controls the time the system
                                     displays on the LCD. This setting displays as
                                     two digits for each hour (HH) and two digits for
                                     each minute (MM).
                                                               (Continued on next page)




                                                                             January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                           Modifying Cart Settings                107




                                        (Contd)
                                     Setting Name                       Definition

                           DATE                     This setting controls the date the system
                                                    displays on the LCD. The date displays as two
                                                    digits for each month (MM), Day (DD), and
                                                    year (YY). For example, for January 1, 2003,
                                                    you enter 010103.

                           LIGHT ON                 This setting controls the number of minutes
                                                    that the cart’s optional night light stays on after
                                                    the cart is secure. The default number of
                                                    minutes is 01. Available settings are 01 to 99
                                                    minutes.

                           Custom Port              This setting controls the port that the cart uses
                                                    for the access card accessory.



                                                                                  (Continued on next page)




January 2004
108                          Modifying Cart Settings               Programming the Cart From the Cart




      Procedure   Complete the following procedure to modify cart settings.
                  Note
                  In System Response sections of this table, “XXX” or “XX” represent your
                  cart’s current setting. Press ESC to exit to cart settings.


                     Step                                    Action

                         1     Enter Programming Mode.
                               Reference
                               For step-by-step instructions, see Entering Programming
                               Mode on page 97.
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               1-RECALL EVENTS
                               2-EDIT PROGRAM
                         2     Press 2 (EDIT PROGRAM).
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               EDIT USER ACCESS?
                               1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                         3     Press 2 (NO).
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               EDIT CART SETTINGS?
                               1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                         4     Press 1 (YES).
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               BEEPER LEVEL XXX
                               1-ACCEPT 2-CHG

                                                                              (Continued on next page)




                                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                    Modifying Cart Settings                109




                             (Contd)
                              Step                                     Action

                                5      Do you want to change the beeper level?
                                       Note
                                       If the beeper level is set to OFF, this setting overrides all
                                       other beeper settings and turns off all audible indicators.
                                           If yes, press 2 (CHG) until the LCD displays the beeper level
                                           that you want (OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH), and press
                                           1 (ACCEPT).
                                           If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       ALARM XX
                                       1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                                6      Do you want to change the cart’s alarm setting (ON or OFF)?
                                           If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT).
                                           If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays one of the following messages depending
                                       on your cart’s options.
                                           NARC ALARM XX
                                           1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                                           Go to the next step.
                                           NARC 1 ALARM XX
                                           1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                                           Go to the next step.
                                           KEY BEEP XX
                                           1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                                           Go to Step 9.
                                                                                        (Continued on next page)




January 2004
110             Modifying Cart Settings             Programming the Cart From the Cart




      (Contd)
       Step                                     Action

        7        Do you want to change the cart’s eNarc alarm setting for drawer 1
                 (ON or OFF)?
                     If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT).
                     If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays one of the following messages depending
                 on your cart’s options:
                     NARC 2 ALARM XX
                     1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                     Go to the next step.
                     KEY BEEP XX
                     1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                     Go to Step 9.

        8        Do you want to change the cart’s eNarc alarm setting for drawer 2
                 (ON or OFF)?
                     If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT).
                     If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 KEY BEEP XX?
                 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
        9        Do you want to change your cart’s key beep setting (ON or OFF)?
                     If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT).
                     If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 AUTO SECURE XX MINUTES
                 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                                                              (Continued on next page)




                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                  Modifying Cart Settings               111




                             (Contd)
                              Step                                    Action

                               10      Do you want to change the cart’s auto secure interval setting?
                                           If yes:
                                               Press 2 (CHG).
                                           System Response
                                           The LCD displays the following message:
                                           AUTO SECURE _ _ MIN
                                           USE KEYPAD TO CHANGE
                                               Enter a 2-digit number between 01 and 99 minutes.
                                           System Response
                                           When you enter two digits, the LCD displays the value
                                           you enter and re-displays 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG.
                                           If you enter the wrong value, you can repeat this task as
                                           many times as needed by pressing 2 (CHG) and entering
                                           a new value.
                                               Press 1 (ACCEPT).
                                           If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       MTN DETECTOR XXXX
                                       1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                               11      Do you want to adjust the cart’s auto-relock motion detector (MTN
                                       DETECTOR) sensitivity (1-10 and OFF)?
                                           If yes, press 2 (CHG) until the LCD displays the setting level
                                           that you want, and press 1 (ACCEPT).
                                           If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       ACCESS CODE XXXX
                                       1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                                                                                     (Continued on next page)




January 2004
112             Modifying Cart Settings               Programming the Cart From the Cart




      (Contd)
       Step                                     Action

        12       Do you want to change the cart’s type of access code setting
                 (GENERAL or SPECIFIC)?
                 Warning
                 If your users have individual user access codes and you
                 change the setting from SPECIFIC to GENERAL, the users
                 will not be able to access the cart. Conversely, if you want to
                 change the cart’s type of access code from GENERAL to
                 SPECIFIC, you must add new users and assign each user a
                 specific access code before they can access the cart. See
                 Adding a User on page 121.
                     If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT).
                     If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays one of the following messages depending
                 on your cart options:
                     NARC CODE XXX
                     1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                     Go to the next step.
                     CHG CART MASTER CODE
                     1-NO 2-CHG
                     Go to Step 15.
                                                                (Continued on next page)




                                                                              January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                   Modifying Cart Settings              113




                             (Contd)
                              Step                                    Action

                               13      If applicable, do you want to change cart’s type of eNarc access
                                       code (SPECIFIC or GENERAL)?
                                       Warning
                                       If your users have individual eNarc access codes and you
                                       change the setting from SPECIFIC to GENERAL, the users
                                       will not be able to access the eNarc drawers with their
                                       SPECIFIC eNarc access code. Conversely, if you want to
                                       change the cart’s type of eNarc access code from GENERAL
                                       to SPECIFIC, you must add new users and assign each user
                                       a specific eNarc access code before they can access the
                                       eNarc drawers. See Adding a User on page 121.
                                           If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT).
                                           If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       PERSONAL EDITING XX
                                       1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                               14      Do you want to allow personal editing to enable cart users to
                                       change access codes (NO or YES)?
                                       Warning
                                       If a user with personal editing capabilities selects an access
                                       code that is already in use, the LCD displays a CODE NOT
                                       AVAILABLE message, which could potentially compromise
                                       the security of your medication cart. To eliminate this
                                       possibility, do not allow personal editing.
                                           If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT).
                                           If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       CHG CART MASTER CODE
                                       1-NO 2-CHG
                                                                                     (Continued on next page)




January 2004
114             Modifying Cart Settings             Programming the Cart From the Cart




      (Contd)
       Step                                   Action

        15       Do you want to change the cart’s master code?
                 Warning
                 If you change the master code, be sure to provide the new
                 code to any administrators who need it to perform their
                 required activities.
                     If yes:
                         Press 2 (CHG).
                     System Response
                     The LCD displays the following message:
                     ENTER NEW CART
                     MASTER CODE _ _ _ _
                         Enter a new master code.
                     System Response
                     The LCD displays the following message:
                     ACCEPT XXXX AS NEW
                     CODE? 1-YES, 2-NO
                         Press 1 (YES).

                     If no, press 1 (NO).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 CHG OVERRIDE CODE?
                 1-NO 2-CHG
                                                              (Continued on next page)




                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                 Modifying Cart Settings              115




                             (Contd)
                              Step                                  Action

                               16      Do you want to change the cart’s override code?
                                       Warning
                                       If you change the override code, be sure to provide the new
                                       code to any users who need it to perform their required
                                       activities.
                                           If yes:
                                               Press 2 (CHG).
                                           System Response
                                           The LCD displays the following message:
                                           ENTER NEW OVERRIDE
                                           CODE _ _ _ _
                                               Enter a new override code.
                                           System Response
                                           The LCD displays the following message:
                                           ACCEPT XXXX AS NEW
                                           CODE? 1-YES, 2-NO
                                               Press 1 (YES).
                                           If no, press 1 (NO).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       TIME _ _: _ _ [displays time]
                                       1- ACCEPT 2-CHG
                                                                                   (Continued on next page)




January 2004
116             Modifying Cart Settings             Programming the Cart From the Cart




      (Contd)
       Step                                     Action

        17       Do you want to change the time that displays in the LCD?
                     If yes:
                         Press 2 (CHG).
                     System Response
                     The LCD displays the following message:
                     TIME _ _:_ _AM
                     USE KEYPAD TO CHANGE
                         Enter the new time in HH:MM format.
                     System Response
                     The LCD displays the following message:
                     1-ACCEPT, 2-AM, 3-PM
                         Press 1 (ACCEPT), 2 (AM) or 3 (PM), as appropriate.
                         Press 1 (ACCEPT).

                     If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 DATE _ _ / _ _ / _ _ [displays date]
                 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG

                                                              (Continued on next page)




                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                 Modifying Cart Settings              117




                             (Contd)
                              Step                                   Action

                               18      Do you want to change the date that displays in the LCD?
                                          If yes:
                                              Press 2 (CHG).
                                          System Response
                                          The LCD displays the following message:
                                          DATE _ _/_ _/_ _
                                          USE KEYPAD TO CHANGE
                                              Enter the new date in MM/DD/YY format.
                                          System Response
                                          The LCD displays the following message:
                                          1-ACCEPT, 2-CHG
                                              Press 1 (ACCEPT).

                                          If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following messages depending on
                                       your cart options:
                                          LIGHT ON FOR XX MIN.
                                          1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                                          Go to the next step.
                                          CUSTOM PORT SETTING XXX?
                                          1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                                          Go to step 20.
                                          BEEPER LEVEL XXX
                                          1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                                          You have proceeded through the end of the settings and
                                          are back at the beginning of the list. Go to Step 21.
                                                                                   (Continued on next page)




January 2004
118             Modifying Cart Settings              Programming the Cart From the Cart




      (Contd)
       Step                                     Action

        19       Do you want to change the amount of time that the night light stays
                 on after the cart secures (01 - 99 MIN)?
                     If yes:
                         Press 2 (CHG).
                     System Response
                     The LCD displays the following message:
                     LIGHT ON FOR _ _ MIN
                     1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                         Enter the new time in two-digit format.
                         Press 1 (ACCEPT).

                     If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 CUSTOM PORT SETTING XXX?
                 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
        20       Do you want to change the custom port setting (NONE, COM1,
                 COM2, COM 3)?
                 WARNING
                 Adjusting this setting could negatively impact your ability to
                 access the Cart Host software and/or the cart. Do not adjust
                 this setting without first consulting Artromick Technical
                 Support.
                     If yes, press 2 (CHG) until the LCD displays the setting that you
                     want, and press 1 (ACCEPT).
                     If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 BEEPER LEVEL XXX?
                 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
        21       Press ESC to exit cart settings or repeat the procedure to modify
                 any cart settings.




                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                      Managing Cart Users               119




Managing Cart Users


      Introduction        With regard to user access settings, your cart is configured in one of two ways
                          based on your organization’s requirements and the preconfigured setup of your
                          cart.

                          A GENERAL configuration means that your cart is configured for use with one
                          access code. Therefore, if more than one user is accessing the cart, you cannot
                          track individual activity. Your cart is preconfigured to include default GENERAL
                          user access settings that you can modify as needed.

                          A SPECIFIC configuration means that your cart is configured to have multiple
                          user profiles. In this case, you must add user profiles to the cart and assign each
                          user or group of users a unique user access profile. This enables you to track
                          individual user activity using the Recall Events functionality.

                          The type of configuration that your cart uses is specified in the ACCESS CODE
                          section of your cart settings.
                          Reference
                          See Modifying Cart Settings on page 103 for more information.




      Managing            To manage GENERAL access, you can modify the settings associated with your
  GENERAL User            default user access profile.
        Access            Reference
                          See Adding a User on page 121 for more information.


                                                                                        (Continued on next page)




January 2004
120                            Managing Cart Users                     Programming the Cart From the Cart




     Managing      To manage SPECIFIC users, you must:
 SPECIFIC User         Add user profiles as necessary.
       Access
                       Reference
                       See Adding a User on page 121 for more information.
                       Modify users as necessary.
                       Reference
                       See Adding a User on page 121 for more information.
                       Delete users as necessary.
                       Reference
                       See Adding a User on page 121 for more information.




        General    When you access user settings for a given user, the LCD displays all of the user’s
      Navigation   settings in a list. To move through the list in order to view settings and navigate to
                   a specific setting, press 1 (ACCEPT) to advance in the list to the next setting
                   without changing the current setting. When you display the last setting selection,
                   press 1 (ACCEPT) to return to the beginning of the list. You can repeat this
                   process as many times as needed.

                   To change a setting currently displayed, press 2 (CHG), enter new information (if
                   applicable), and then press 1 (ACCEPT).

                   To scroll backward through the setting selection list, press ESC.




                                                                                              January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                             Adding a User               121




Adding a User


      Introduction        If your cart is configured for SPECIFIC access, you must add a profile for each
                          user. When you add a user, you define:
                              User #
                              User Type
                              Cart Override
                              Access Code
                              NARC Access DWR
                              (This setting only applies to carts which have the eNarc optional accessory)
                              NARC Code
                              (This setting only applies to carts which have the eNarc optional accessory)

                          Creating this profile enables you track individual activity using the Recall Events
                          functionality.
                          Note
                          The type of configuration (GENERAL or SPECIFIC) that your cart uses is
                          specified in the ACCESS CODE section of your cart settings. For more
                          information, see Modifying Cart Settings on page 103.


                                                                                         (Continued on next page)




January 2004
122                           Adding a User                          Programming the Cart From the Cart




    User Access    The following table describes the user access settings. The settings are listed in
Settings Defined   the table as the cart displays them in the LCD list.


                               Setting                                  Definition

                    USER #                           A unique, four-digit number that identifies the
                                                     cart user. After a User # is entered and
                                                     accepted, it cannot be modified.

                    USER TYPE                        A User Type defines basic levels of user
                                                     access. User Types include:
                                                             Normal: This User Type enables a
                                                             user to access specific areas of the
                                                             cart. This person cannot perform
                                                             programming or recall functions. This
                                                             is the default setting.
                                                             Admin: This User Type enables a
                                                             user to perform all programming and
                                                             Recall Event functions and to access
                                                             all areas of the cart.

                    CART OVERRIDE                    If set to YES, this setting grants users the right
                                                     to use the Override Code. The Override Code
                                                     is a four-digit code that is assigned to the cart.
                                                     The code bypasses alarms, timers, and
                                                     relocking mechanisms. Typically, this function
                                                     is used while the cart is being restocked in the
                                                     pharmacy. Available CART OVERRIDE
                                                     options are NO or YES.

                    ACCESS CODE                      An Access Code is a unique, four-digit PIN that
                                                     enables a user to access the cart. The Access
                                                     Code can be modified.
                                                                                (Continued on next page)




                                                                                              January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                   Adding a User               123




                                      (Contd)
                                      Setting                        Definition

                           NARC ACCESS DWR          NARC ACCESS DWR enables an
                                                    administrator to assign access to secured,
                                                    eNarc drawers and then further specify which
                           Note                     drawer(s) by selecting one of the following:
                           This setting only
                                                       NONE
                           applies to carts which
                           have the eNarc              DRW 1
                           optional accessory.         DRW 2 (if applicable to the cart’s
                                                       configuration)
                                                       DRW 1& 2 (if applicable to the cart’s
                                                       configuration)
                                                    Note
                                                    The location of the eNarc drawers
                                                    depends on the configuration of your
                                                    cart.

                           NARC CODE                A NARC CODE is a unique, four-digit number
                                                    that provides access to the secured eNarc
                           Note
                                                    drawer(s).
                           This setting only
                           applies to carts which
                           have the eNarc
                           optional accessory and
                           NARC ACCESS DWR
                           access.



                                                                               (Continued on next page)




January 2004
124                          Adding a User                          Programming the Cart From the Cart




      Procedure   Complete the following procedure to add a user.


                     Step                                     Action

                       1       Enter Programming Mode.
                               Reference
                               For step-by-step instructions, see Entering Programming
                               Mode on page 97.
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               1-RECALL EVENTS
                               2-EDIT PROGRAM
                       2       Press 2 (EDIT PROGRAM).
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               EDIT USER ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                       3       Press 1 (YES).
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               ADD NEW USER? 1-YES, 2-NO
                       4       Press 1 (YES).
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               ENTER NEW USER #
                       5       Enter a unique, four-digit User #.
                               Note
                               The User # identifies the user. The User # is not the same as
                               an access code and cannot be modified after it is accepted.
                               For simple programming, however, the User # can be the
                               same four-digit number as the Access Code that you assign
                               later in this procedure.
                               System Response
                               The LCD displays the following message:
                               USER TYPE NORMAL? 1-YES 2-CHG
                                                                              (Continued on next page)



                                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                             Adding a User               125




                             (Contd)
                              Step                                    Action

                                6      Do you want to make this user an administrator?
                                           If yes:
                                               Press 2 (CHG)
                                               Press 1 (YES)
                                               Press 1 (ACCEPT)
                                           If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       CART OVERRIDE NO? 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                                7      Do you want this user to have cart override rights?
                                           If yes:
                                               Press 2 (CHG)
                                               Press 1 (ACCEPT)
                                           If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       USER # * * * * ENTER ACCESS CODE * * * *
                                8      Enter a four-digit Access Code for the user.
                                       Note
                                       For simple programming, the Access Code can be the same
                                       four-digit number as the User # that you assigned earlier in
                                       this procedure.
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       USER # * * * *, VERIFY CODE * * * *?
                                       1-YES 2-NO
                                9      Verify that the Access Code is correct, and press 1 (YES).
                                                                                      (Continued on next page)




January 2004
126             Adding a User                        Programming the Cart From the Cart




      (Contd)
       Step                                     Action

        10       Do one of the following:
                     If your LCD displays:
                     NARC ACCESS? NONE, 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                     Go to the next step.
                     If your LCD displays:
                     ADD NEW USER? 1-YES, 2-NO
                     Either repeat this procedure to add another user or press
                     2 (No) to complete this procedure.

        11       Do you want to give this user access to the eNarc drawer(s)?
                     If yes, press 2 (CHG).
                     Note
                     If your cart has two eNarc drawers, press
                     2 (CHG) until you display the setting you want, then
                     press 1 (ACCEPT) and go to the next step.
                     System Response
                     The LCD displays the following message:
                     USER # * * * * ENTER NEW NARC CODE * * * *
                     If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). You have completed this procedure.

        12       Enter a unique, four-digit Narc Code for this user.
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 USER # * * * *, VERIFY NARC CODE * * * *
        13       Verify that the NARC Code is correct and press 1 (YES).




                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                  Modifying User Profiles              127




Modifying User Profiles


      Introduction        This section describes how to modify user access settings, including:
                              Access code settings
                              eNarc access code settings (if applicable)




    Modifying A           Complete the following procedure to modify user access settings.
    User’s Code
 Access Settings
                              Step                                   Action

                                1      Enter Programming Mode.
                                       Reference
                                       For step-by-step instructions, see Entering Programming
                                       Mode on page 97.
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       1-RECALL EVENTS
                                       2-EDIT PROGRAM
                                2      Press 2 (EDIT PROGRAM).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       EDIT USER ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                                3      Press 1 (YES).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       EDIT CODE ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                                4      Press 1 (YES) and enter the user’s four-digit User #.
                                                                                    (Continued on next page)




January 2004
128             Modifying User Profiles              Programming the Cart From the Cart




      (Contd)
       Step                                     Action

        5        Do you want to edit the User Type setting?
                     If yes, press 2 (CHG) and press 1 (ACCEPT).
                     If no press, 1 (ACCEPT).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 CART OVERRIDE NO? 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
        6        Do you want to edit the Override setting?
                     If yes, press 2 (CHG) and press 1 (ACCEPT).
                     If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 USER# XXXX ENTER ACCESS CODE _ _ _ _
        7        Enter a new four-digit Access Code for this user.
                 Note
                 If you enter a code that is already in use, the LCD displays a
                 CODE NOT AVAILABLE message.
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 USER# XXXX VERIFY CODE 1-YES 2-NO
        8        Verify that the code information is correct and press 1 (YES).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 EDIT CODE ACCESS? 1-YES 2-NO




                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                    Modifying User Profiles              129




      Modifying a         Complete the following procedure to modify eNarc access codes.
     User’s eNarc
     Access Code
         Settings             Step                                    Action

                                1     Enter Programming Mode.
                                      Reference
                                      For step-by-step instructions, see Entering Programming
                                      Mode on page 97.
                                      System Response
                                      The LCD displays the following message:
                                      1-RECALL EVENTS
                                      2-EDIT PROGRAM
                                2     Press 2 (EDIT PROGRAM).
                                      System Response
                                      The LCD displays the following message:
                                      EDIT USER ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                                3     Press 1 (YES).
                                      System Response
                                      The LCD displays the following message:
                                      EDIT CODE ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                                4     Press 2 (NO).
                                      System Response
                                      The LCD displays the following message:
                                      EDIT NARC ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                                5     Press 1 (YES).
                                      System Response
                                      The LCD displays the following message:
                                      ENTER USER # _ _ _ _
                                6     Enter the four-digit User # .
                                      System Response
                                      The LCD displays the following message:
                                      NARC ACCESS DWR1 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG
                                                                                      (Continued on next page)




January 2004
130             Modifying User Profiles              Programming the Cart From the Cart




      (Contd)
       Step                                     Action

        7        Do you want to edit this user’s eNarc drawer setting?
                     If yes, press 2 (CHG) until you see the option that you want.
                     Press 1 (ACCEPT).
                     If no, press 1 (ACCEPT).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 USER # ENTER NEW NARC CODE
        8        Enter a new a four-digit eNarc Narc Access code.
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 USER # * * * *, VERIFY NARC CODE * * * *
                 1-YES 2-NO
        9        Verify that the code is correct and press 1 (YES).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 EDIT NARC ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC




                                                                            January 2004
Programming the Cart From the Cart                                            Deleting a User              131




Deleting a User


      Introduction        If your cart requires SPECIFIC access codes, you can delete user profiles that
                          you add to the cart.
                          Note
                          The type of configuration (GENERAL or SPECIFIC) that your cart uses is
                          specified in the ACCESS CODE section of your cart settings. For more
                          information, see Modifying Cart Settings on page 103.




        Procedure         Complete the following procedure to delete a user.


                              Step                                   Action

                                 1     Enter Programming Mode.
                                       Reference
                                       For step-by-step instructions, see Entering Programming
                                       Mode on page 97.
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       1-RECALL EVENTS
                                       2-EDIT PROGRAM
                                 2     Press 2 (EDIT PROGRAM).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       EDIT USER ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                                 3     Press 1 (YES).
                                       System Response
                                       The LCD displays the following message:
                                       EDIT CODE ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
                                                                                      (Continued on next page)




January 2004
132             Deleting a User                      Programming the Cart From the Cart




      (Contd)
       Step                                     Action

        4        Press 2 (NO).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 EDIT NARC ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
        5        Press 2 (NO).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 DELETE USER? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC
        6        Press 1 (YES).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 ENTER USER NUMBER TO DELETE _ _ _ _
        7        Enter the four-digit User #.
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 DELETE USER XXXX CONFIRM 1-YES 2-NO
        8        Verify that the User Number that displays is correct. Press 1 (YES).
                 System Response
                 The LCD displays the following message:
                 DELETE USER? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC




                                                                            January 2004
-133
                                                                                                  133



                                                                                                 A
                                                     Event Master List



       Event Codes   This appendix describes the codes that display on the LCD when you use Recall
                     Events mode or on the Cart Host software log file.


                       Event #    Cart Text          Cart Host Text     Comment

                      1           Invalid Code       Invalid Code       Invalid access code
                                                                        entered

                      2           Code Access        Code Access        Cart opened by access
                                                                        code

                      3           Key Access         Key Access         Cart opened with key

                      4           Manual             Manual             Cart closed manually
                                  Secured            Secured

                      5           Keypad             Keypad             Cart closed with keypad
                                  Secured            Secured            secure

                      6           Auto Secured       Auto Secured       Cart closed after auto-
                                                                        secure timeout

                      7           Narc Secured       Narc Secured       Narcotics drawers all
                                                                        closed

                      8           Power              Power              Power restored to the
                                  Restored           Restored           cart

                      9           Narc Access        Narc Access        Narcotics drawer access
                                                                        allowed

                      10          Ovrrd Access       Override           Override access allowed
                                                     Access                (Continued on next page)



January 2004
134                                                           Event Master List




      (Contd)
      Event #   Cart Text       Cart Host Text   Comment

      11        3 Bad Codes     3 Bad Codes      Three bad access codes
                                                 were entered

      12        NARC Open       Secure Drawer    Narcotic drawer open
                Sec             Opened           when access not
                                                 allowed.

      13        Secure Fault    Secure Drawer    Lock mechanism in
                                Fault            wrong position after
                                                 securing cart

      14        Master Prog     Master           Master programming
                                Programming      mode was entered
                                Allowed

      15        Master Recall   Master Recall    Master event recall mode
                                Allowed          was entered

      16        User Edit       User Edit        Personal edit mode was
                                Allowed          entered

      17        Master Cd Chg   Master Code      Master access code was
                                Changed          changed

      18        Mod Access      Access Code      A users access code
                Cd              Changed          was changed

      19        Mod User        User Access      A users access level was
                Level           Level Changed    changed (admin/normal)

      20        Mod Narc        Narc Access      A users narcotics access
                Acces           Level Changed    level was changed
                                                 (none, 1, 2 or both)

      21        Mod Narc        Narc Code        A users narcotics access
                Code            Changed          code was changed

      22        Add User        User Added       A user was added

      23        Delete User     User Deleted     A user was deleted
                                                    (Continued on next page)



                                                                    January 2004
Event Master List                                                                        135




                    (Contd)
                    Event #   Cart Text        Cart Host Text   Comment

                    24        Mod AutoSec      AutoSecure       The auto-secure time
                              Dl               Delay            was changed
                                               Changed

                    25        Mod Prsnl Edit   Personal         Personal editing was
                                               Editing          enabled or disabled
                                               Changed

                    26        Modify Time      Time Changed     The time was changed

                    27        Modify Date      Date Changed     The date was changed

                    28        Modify Alarm     Alarm Enable     Alarm was enabled or
                                               Changed          disabled

                    29        Modify Alm Lvl   Alarm Level      The alarm level was
                                               Changed          changed

                    30        Mod Narc Cd      Narc Code        Narcotics code was
                              Tp               Type Changed     changed to specific or
                                                                general

                    31        Mod Ovrrd        Override Code    The override code as
                              Code             Changed          changed

                    32        Mod GenNarc      General Narc     The general narcotics
                              Cd               Code Changed     code was changed

                    33        Mod Gen Acc      General          The general access code
                              Cd               Access Code      was changed
                                               Changed

                    34        Spr Mastr Alwd   Super Master     Super master access
                                               Access           was allowed
                                               Allowed

                    35        Narc1 Acc        Narc1 Access     Access was allowed to
                              Alwd             Allowed          narcotics drawer 1
                                                                   (Continued on next page)




January 2004
136                                                         Event Master List




      (Contd)
      Event #   Cart Text       Cart Host Text   Comment

      36        Narc2 Acc       Narc2 Access     Access was allowed to
                Alwd            Allowed          narcotics drawer 2

      37        Mod Narc1 Alm   Narc1 Alarm      Narcotics drawer 1 alarm
                                Changed          was enabled or disabled

      38        Mod Narc2 Alm   Narc2 Alarm      Narcotics drawer 2 alarm
                                Changed          was enabled or disabled

      39        Mod Accs Cd     Access Code      Access code was
                Tp              Type Changed     changed to general or
                                                 specific

      40        Mod Key Beep    Key Beep         Key beep was enabled
                                Changed          or disabled

      41        Mod Custom      Custom Port      Port used for custom
                Prt             Changed          input was changed

      42        Mod Mtn         Motion Detect    Motion detect level was
                Detect          Changed          changed




                                                                 January 2004
-137
                                                                                                        137



                                                                                                        B
                                                            Troubleshooting



       General Tips   If the cart does not function properly try the following:
                          Use the red Reset button on the back of the cart to restart the cart.
                          Make sure the charger is connected at the cart and at the wall. If the battery
                          was completely discharged it may take several minutes to recharge enough to
                          operate cart.
                          Use the main key to unlock the cart and call your supervisor for further
                          assistance.
                          You can also use the eNarc override located in the rear service panel.
                          To access this override you must open the back panel by pushing the
                          black release button until it extends, then turn clockwise.

                          The override uses a tubular key and the lock is located in the back
                          divider panel in one of the four holes. Insert the key, turn and hold while
                          opening the eNarc drawer.
                          If the LCD indicates an incorrect code, please see your supervisor for the
                          correct code.
                          If none of these tips remedy the problem, please contact your supervisor or
                          Artromick Technical Support 24/7 at 800-848-6462.




   Restarting Your    Restarting your cart is similar to restarting your PC. Occasionally a procedure
              Cart    requires that you reset the cart.

                      To restart the cart, press the red Reset button on the back of the cart. This red
                      button is located directly above the charger connector.




January 2004
138   Troubleshooting




          January 2004
-139
                                                                                                        139



                                                                                                        C
                                                                     Setup Guides



       Cart Settings   This table describes the settings on the cart. It also describes what the factory
                       default cart setting is, available options for the setting, and whether the setting can
                       be adjusted from the cart’s keypad.


                        The Setting            The Factory           My Setting              Can I Adjust
                        Name is…               Default for           Options Are…            This From
                                               This Setting                                  the Keypad?
                                               is…

                         Serial No.            M(S)1000000           N/A                     No

                         HW/FW Rev.            1.00/1.02             N/A                     No

                         Super Master          Preset                N/A                     No

                         Cart Name             Account Name          20 Characters           No

                         Cart Number           1-?                   4 Digits                No

                         Cart Master           7777                  Four digits             Yes

                         Cart Override         5555                  Four digits             Yes

                         User Code Type        General               General or              Yes
                                                                     Specific

                         General Access        1234                  Four digits             Yes
                         Code

                         eNarc Code            General               General or              Yes
                         Type                                        Specific




January 2004
140                                                                  Setup Guides




      (Contd)
      The Setting        The Factory    My Setting              Can I Adjust
      Name is…           Default for    Options Are…            This From
                         This Setting                           the Keypad?
                         is…

      eNarc General      4321           Four digits             Yes
      Code

      Auto Secure        5 mins.        1 – 99 mins.            Yes
      Delay

      Motion Detector    5              Off – 10                Yes

      Personal Editing   No             Yes or No               Yes

      Alarm Enable       On             On or Off               Yes

      eNarc Alarm        On             On or Off               Yes

      Beeper Level       Med            Off, low, Med or        Yes
                                        High

      Key Beep           On             On or Off               Yes

      Light Timeout      1              1 – 99                  Yes

      eNarc Number       None           None, 1, or 2           No

      Host port          Comm 1         Comm 1,2,3,             No

      Printer port       Comm 1         Comm 1,2,3,             No

      Custom port        None           Comm 1,2,3,             Yes

      Time               EST            12 Hour Format          Yes

      Date               Current        Month/Day/ Year         Yes


                                                           (Continued on next page)




                                                                      January 2004
Setup Guides                                                                                        141




      Default User   At the factory, Artromick programs your cart to include one default user that can
            Sheet    be used with Specific configurations. This enables you to switch between Specific
                     and General configurations without negatively impacting your ability to access the
                     cart.

                     This table describes the default user that Artromick initially programs on the cart
                     for use with Specific configurations.

                     The first two columns (“The Setting Name is…” and “The Factory Default for This
                     Setting is…”) describe the name of the setting and the default value that Artromick
                     programs at the factory, respectively.

                     The second two columns (“My Setting Options Are…” and “Can I Adjust This
                     From the Keypad?”) can be used as a reference if you want to set up additional
                     users after the cart is delivered.


                      The Setting          The Factory             My Setting          Can I Adjust
                      Name is…             Default for This        Options             This From the
                                           Setting is…             Are…                Keypad?

                       User ID             3333                    0001 – 9999         Input new only
                                                                                       or delete

                       Name                (Blank)                 10 Characters       No

                       Override            Off                     On or Off           Yes

                       User Type           Administrator           Administrator/      Yes
                                                                   Normal

                       Access Code         3333                    4 Unique            Yes
                                                                   Numbers

                       Narc Access         Drawer 1 & 2            None, Drawer        Yes
                                                                   1, 2,
                                                                   1&2

                       Narc Code           4444                    0000 – 9999         Yes

                       Extended ID         (Blank)                 16 Characters       No




January 2004
142   Setup Guides




       January 2004
Avalo AC Medication Cart Host Software Manual




                                                                          Index
Symbols                                   setting 24, 26, 104, 105
                                        Auto Secure setting 69
*.crt 39, 58
                                        AutoLock
*.log 39
                                          system 24
*.usr 39, 73, 79
                                          timer 4, 26
                                            and cart movement 26
A                                       AutoLock timer
AC Systems Support Panel 7, 23, 46        activity 26
access                                    relock process 26
  access card 17                          using 26
  Access Code and Access Card 18        automatic relock, narcotics drawers 28
  Access Code only 16                   Avalo Cart Host 42
  alarms 20
  cart 4, 15                            B
  code and access card 18
                                        battery 4
  denied 19
                                          charging 22
  Host software 42
                                          low 32
  Host software cart settings file 66
                                          low power 22
  Host software log file 54
                                          recharge time 23
  key 19
                                          testing 22
  messages 20
                                        Battery button 5
  problems 19
                                        BATTERY NEEDS RECHARGED SOON 22
access card 4, 9, 15, 17, 18, 20
                                        BATTERY STATUS UNAVAILABLE 22
  denied 19
                                        baud 47
access code 4, 9
                                        Baud Rate 62
  incorrect 19
  setting 106, 122                      beeper level setting 60, 103
Access Code field 74, 75, 76, 86        Bits per Second 47
accessing
  Host software user file 79            C
Active field 85                         cart
activity monitor 26                       access 4, 15
Add Group 82                                 problems 19
Admin user role 8, 73, 83, 86, 122        access methods 15
alarm 19, 24                              access with code only 16
  access 20                               activity tracking 4
  eNarc 28                                auto secure 4
  setting 60, 104, 105                    components 4
Alarm Enable check box 60                 controls 4
Alarm/Beeper setting 69                   features 4
Allowed drop-down list 59                 modifying settings 108
Always Required check box 61              movement 26
audit tracking 99                         reading the 80
auto secure                               secure function 24
  function 4                              settings 4


January 2004
ii                                         Avalo AC Medication Cart Host Software Manual




    list 69, 103                        Custom Port drop-down list 63
    modification procedure 108
    modifying 103                       D
  writing to the 81
                                        Data Bit 62
Cart Access Reset Button 7
                                        Data Bits 47
Cart Codes setting 69
                                        Date field 51, 52
Cart fields 58
                                        DATE setting 107
Cart Host software 9, 38, 39
                                        definitions
Cart Master field 59                      cart settings 58, 103
Cart Override field 59
                                          general 9
CART OVERRIDE user access setting 122
                                        Delay field 59
Cart setting 69
                                        Delete User button 94
cart settings
                                        deleting
  Host software modifications 69
                                          Host software user 93
  reading from cart 67
                                        deleting users 131
  writing 68
                                        Description field 52
Cart Settings file 9
                                        Device Manager 47
cart settings file 39, 58
                                        documentation conventions 3
  accessing 66
  Alarm/Beeper 69
  Auto Secure 69                        E
  Cart 69                               Edit User dialog box 90, 91
  Cart Codes 69                         electronic keyless narcotic storage 4, 5, 28
  Com Port Setup 69                     eNarc 4, 61
  creating 58                             alarms 28
  Light Timeout 69                        drawers, access 123
  Narcotics 69                            messages 28
  Personal Editing 69                     modifying settings 129
  Time/Date 69                            using 28
  User Codes 69                         eNarc button 5
CartHost 42                             ESC button 5
cascade feature 39                      Event field 52
Charge Input 7                          event recall 4
CHARGE outlet 23                          exiting 99
CHG CART MASTER CODE setting 106          link to host 99
Clear button 6                            printing 99
Close 63                                  procedure 100
Close button 52                           reviewing 99
Code Type drop-down list 62             Extended ID field 74, 75, 76, 87
Code Type field 51
COM port settings 47                    F
  configuring 47                        Function button 5
COM port setup 62
Com Port Setup 47
Com Port Setup setting 69
                                        G
communication ports 7                   General Code field 61, 62
Communications (COM) Port
  settings 43                           H
configuration                           Host Port drop-down list 62
  COM port 47                           Host software 9, 38, 39
connector panel 7, 46                    access 42

                                                                              January 2004
Avalo AC Medication Cart Host Software Manual




 deleting users 93                       Minutes field 60
 installation 40                         monitoring 26
 log file 51                             moving the cart 26
 modifying cart settings 69              MTN DETECTOR setting 26, 59, 104, 105
 modifying eNarc access 91
HW/FW Rev field 58                       N
                                         Name field 51, 52, 58, 73, 86
I                                        Narc 1 Alarm check box 60
ID field 52, 73, 85                      NARC 1 ALARM setting 104, 105
idle mode 26                             Narc 2 Alarm check box 60
installation                             NARC 2 ALARM setting 104, 105
   Host software 40                      NARC ACCESS DWR user access setting 74,
installation, software                   75, 76, 83, 86, 123
   requirements 38                       Narc Code field 74, 75, 76, 87
Intelligent Power Management System 22   NARC CODE setting 106
                                         narcotic code 10
K                                        narcotics drawers 4, 28
                                           accessing 29
key access 4, 15, 19
                                           automatic re-lock 28
Key Beep check box 60
                                         Narcotics setting 69
KEY BEEP setting 104, 105
                                         night light 4
keypad buttons 5
                                           adjustable timer 32
keypad, securing cart with 24
                                           time interval 32
Keyswitch user role 8
                                           using 32
                                         Normal user role 8, 73, 83, 86, 122
L                                        Num Drawers drop-down list 61
LCD 9                                    Num field 52
Level drop-down list 60                  Number field 58
light
   auto shut-off 32                      O
   time interval 32
   using 32                              OK button 83, 87
Light button 5                           Override check box 74, 75, 76, 86
LIGHT ON setting 107                     override code 4, 10
Light Timeout 60                           using 30
Light timeout setting 69
LINK TO HOST OPEN 49                     P
log file 9, 39                           Parity 47, 62
   accessing 54                          PC fields 59
   creating 53                           Personal Editing field 52
   definition 51                         PERSONAL EDITING setting 106
   introduction 51                       Personal Editing setting 69
   updating 54                           personal identification number (PIN) 9
                                         pharmacy, restocking 4
M                                        PIN 9
                                           user access code 74, 75, 76, 86, 87, 122
master code 9, 45, 98
                                         Power Output 7
Master Event List 51
                                         power requirements 22
messages
                                         Printer Port drop-down list 62
 access 20
                                         Program Group 41
 eNarc 28


January 2004
iv                                                  Avalo AC Medication Cart Host Software Manual




programming mode 10                                Time field 51, 52
  entering 97                                      TIME setting 106
  procedure 97                                     Time/Date setting 69
                                                   tracking events 99
R                                                  Type drop-down list 61
                                                   type styles in this guide 3
Read Cart 10, 39, 52, 58, 63, 64, 67, 73, 78, 80
reading the cart 80
rear panel 7                                       U
recall events                                      user # 10
  navigation 99                                    user access 4
recall events mode 10, 99                            access card and code 18
recharge battery 22                                  access card only 17
Recharger Unit 23                                    deleting 131
relock time interval 4                               key 19
Reset button 4, 7                                    methods 15
restocking, override code 4                          modifying eNarc settings 129
                                                     modifying settings 127
S                                                    navigating settings 102, 120
                                                     night light 32
secure
                                                     roles 4
  manually 25
                                                     settings 122
  with keypad 24
                                                   User Codes setting 69
Secure button 5
                                                   user file 10, 39, 78, 80, 84, 88, 89, 91, 93
secure drawers 4
                                                     access 79
  types of access 123
                                                     creating 73
secure function 4
                                                   user roles
Secure Time field 52
                                                     Admin 73, 83, 86, 122
security 4, 19
                                                     Normal 73, 83, 86, 122
Serial No. field 58
                                                   User Type field 73, 83, 86
settings
                                                   USER TYPE user access setting 122
  auto secure 24
                                                   user types, cart 8
  cart
     defined 58, 103                               USER# user access setting 122
     modifying 103                                 users, adding 121
  complete list 69, 103                            Users/Events field 58
  definitions 122
  modifying cart 108                               W
  modifying eNarc 129                              Write Cart 11, 39, 58, 63, 68, 73, 81
  modifying user access 127
  user access 122
Setup button 62
setup.exe 40
SN field 51
software, Host 9
Stop Bit 62
Stop Bits 47
system requirements 38

T
terms, general 9


                                                                                           January 2004

More Related Content

PDF
Иструкция Parrot Ar.Drone
PDF
Artromick Ac Usersguide304 for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Documentation de Doctrine ORM
PDF
Artromick Auto Lock Manual for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Ug recording excelmacros
PDF
An introduction-to-tkinter
PDF
TI 84/84+Guidebook
PDF
Pelco c4654 m a-dx-series-client
Иструкция Parrot Ar.Drone
Artromick Ac Usersguide304 for Hospital Computing Solutions
Documentation de Doctrine ORM
Artromick Auto Lock Manual for Hospital Computing Solutions
Ug recording excelmacros
An introduction-to-tkinter
TI 84/84+Guidebook
Pelco c4654 m a-dx-series-client

What's hot (19)

PDF
Diamond
PDF
Manual
PDF
Gemini Manual
PDF
X cart 430-manual
PDF
Doctrine Manual 1.2
PDF
Windows XP Registry Guide
PDF
Hp laser jet 1150 1300 service manual
PDF
M Daemon E Mail Server Manual
PDF
Tools Users Guide
PDF
LG Stylo 2 Owner's Manual (English)
PDF
Adv android 1-0-cc
PDF
Final Design Document 1
PDF
Datacolor 650 600 400 Users Guide 4230 0395 M Rev 1
PDF
NeuroDimension Neuro Solutions HELP
PDF
ZebraNet Bridge Enterprise - Manual do Software
PDF
C sharp programming
PDF
60950106 basis-latest-till-interview-questions
PDF
Sap basis r3 hand book
Diamond
Manual
Gemini Manual
X cart 430-manual
Doctrine Manual 1.2
Windows XP Registry Guide
Hp laser jet 1150 1300 service manual
M Daemon E Mail Server Manual
Tools Users Guide
LG Stylo 2 Owner's Manual (English)
Adv android 1-0-cc
Final Design Document 1
Datacolor 650 600 400 Users Guide 4230 0395 M Rev 1
NeuroDimension Neuro Solutions HELP
ZebraNet Bridge Enterprise - Manual do Software
C sharp programming
60950106 basis-latest-till-interview-questions
Sap basis r3 hand book
Ad

Similar to Artromick Ac Hostguide304 for Hospital Computing Solutions (20)

PDF
Artromick Mcm Manual for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Mcw Manual for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Link planner userguide.3.3.1
PDF
Link planneruserguide.3.3.3
PDF
Gps carminCar Lease in Europe - Drivers HandBook - Renault USAat tomtom manual
PDF
Acer c300 tmc300sg
PDF
Maxis Wireless Modem B932 User Guide
PDF
iTime - Time and Attendance Manual
PDF
인터맥PDA Intermec CN51 2D 산업용PDA 바코드PDA 매뉴얼
PDF
Element V1 6 User Manual Rev A
PDF
Dynasonics i sonic 4000 manual badger meter_open-channel flow meter
PDF
Aja ki pro_mini_manual_v4.1
PDF
Caja Registradora Samsung 350
PDF
Manual para Caja Registradora Samsung 350
PDF
Caja registradora Samsung 350
PDF
Gigaset QV830 Tablet User Guide
PDF
Dns320 manual 100
PDF
My booklive manual
Artromick Mcm Manual for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Mcw Manual for Hospital Computing Solutions
Link planner userguide.3.3.1
Link planneruserguide.3.3.3
Gps carminCar Lease in Europe - Drivers HandBook - Renault USAat tomtom manual
Acer c300 tmc300sg
Maxis Wireless Modem B932 User Guide
iTime - Time and Attendance Manual
인터맥PDA Intermec CN51 2D 산업용PDA 바코드PDA 매뉴얼
Element V1 6 User Manual Rev A
Dynasonics i sonic 4000 manual badger meter_open-channel flow meter
Aja ki pro_mini_manual_v4.1
Caja Registradora Samsung 350
Manual para Caja Registradora Samsung 350
Caja registradora Samsung 350
Gigaset QV830 Tablet User Guide
Dns320 manual 100
My booklive manual
Ad

More from Artromick (20)

PDF
Artromick Choosing And Implementing A Mobile Hospital Cart Solution
PDF
Artromick User Guidelines for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Procedure Specifications for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Regalwood Fd Brochure for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Pintrax User Program for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Pintrax Nurseinfo Program for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Nx10 Reference Manual August 2007 for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Med Surg Specifications for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Med Server Quick Guide for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Isolation Specifications for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Ltc Pc Medication Cart Brochure for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Ltc Ud Medication Cart Brochure for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Iv Therapy Specifications for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Critical Care Product Brochure for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Complete Drawers for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Concept One Product Brochure for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Cart Models for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Artro Drawer for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Av Lockprog for Hospital Computing Solutions
PDF
Artromick Av Drawer Acc for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Choosing And Implementing A Mobile Hospital Cart Solution
Artromick User Guidelines for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Procedure Specifications for Hospital Computing Solutions
Regalwood Fd Brochure for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Pintrax User Program for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Pintrax Nurseinfo Program for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Nx10 Reference Manual August 2007 for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Med Surg Specifications for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Med Server Quick Guide for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Isolation Specifications for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Ltc Pc Medication Cart Brochure for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Ltc Ud Medication Cart Brochure for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Iv Therapy Specifications for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Critical Care Product Brochure for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Complete Drawers for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Concept One Product Brochure for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Cart Models for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Artro Drawer for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Av Lockprog for Hospital Computing Solutions
Artromick Av Drawer Acc for Hospital Computing Solutions

Artromick Ac Hostguide304 for Hospital Computing Solutions

  • 1. Avalo AC Medication Carts by ARTROMICK System3 User’s Manual Host Software Manual Artromick International, Inc. 4800 Hilton Corporate Drive Columbus OH 43232
  • 2. Notice January 2004 © Copyright 2004 ARTROMICK International, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Published 2004. Printed in the United States of America WARNING: ANY UNAUTHORIZED DUPLICATION OF THIS DOCUMENTATION SHALL BE AN INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT. Trade Secret Notice This documentation, the software it describes, and the information and know-how they con- tain constitute the proprietary, confidential and valuable trade secret information of Artro- mick International, Inc., its affiliated companies or its or their licensors, and may not be used for any unauthorized purpose, or disclosed to others without the prior written permission of the applicable Artromick International entity. This documentation and the software which it describes are licensed either “AS IS” or with a limited warranty, as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Other than any limited warranties provided, NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED AND NONE SHALL BE IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR USE OR FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The applicable Artromick International entity reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and to make changes in the content hereof without the obligation to notify any person or entity of such revisions or changes. Product names mentioned herein may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Artromick and Avalo are registered trademarks of Artromick Interna- tional, Inc. Artromick International, Inc. 4800 Hilton Corporate Drive Columbus OH 43232 phone: 800.848.6462 fax: 888.864.9937 www.artromick.com
  • 3. i Table of Contents 0 Chapter 1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Contents .................................................................. 1 About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Introduction.............................................................. 2 Documentation Conventions ................................... 3 Cart Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Cart Features/Components ..................................... 4 Keypad Buttons and Functions ............................... 5 Connector Panel Parts and Functions..................... 7 Cart User Types and Responsibilities ..................... 8 Override Rights ....................................................... 8 Terms and Definitions ............................................. 9 Pre-Configured Settings ........................................ 11 Chapter 2 Using the Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Contents ................................................................ 13 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Introduction............................................................ 14 Accessing the Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Introduction............................................................ 15 Accessing with Access Code Only ........................ 16 Accessing with Access Card Only......................... 17 Accessing with Code and Access Card................. 18 Accessing Using a Key.......................................... 19 Problems Accessing the Cart ................................ 19 Testing and Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Introduction............................................................ 22 Testing the battery................................................. 22 Charging the Battery ............................................. 23 Securing the Avalo AC Medication Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Introduction............................................................ 24 Securing the Cart with the Keypad........................ 24 Securing the Cart Manually ................................... 25 Using the AutoLock Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Introduction............................................................ 26 AutoLock Activity ................................................... 26 Relock Process ..................................................... 27 Using eNarc Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Introduction............................................................ 28 January 2004
  • 4. ii Automatic Re-Lock ................................................................. 28 Alarms and Messages........................................... 28 eNarc Access Procedure....................................... 29 Using the Override Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Introduction............................................................ 30 Procedure.............................................................. 30 Using the Night Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Turning the light on or off from the keypad............ 32 Setting an adjustable timer.................................... 32 Opening the Rear Access Panel Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Introduction............................................................ 33 Procedure.............................................................. 33 Chapter 3 Programming the Cart Using the Host Software . . . . . . . 35 Contents ................................................................ 35 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Introduction............................................................ 38 System Requirements ........................................... 38 Event, User, and Cart Setting Files ....................... 39 Read Cart and Write Cart Functionality................. 39 Arranging Open Files ............................................................. 39 Installing the Host Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Procedure.............................................................. 40 Accessing the Host Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Procedure.............................................................. 42 Connecting the Host Software to the Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Introduction............................................................ 43 Connection Stages ................................................ 43 Preparing Your Cart .............................................. 44 Connecting Your PC or Laptop to the Cart............ 46 Configuring COM Port Settings ............................. 47 Closing the Host Software Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Introduction............................................................ 49 Closing the Host Software Connection Using the Cart ....................................................... 49 Closing the Host Software Connection Using the Software ................................................ 50 Recalling Events Using Host Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Introduction............................................................ 51 Event Master List................................................... 51 Events Log File Defined ........................................ 51 January 2004
  • 5. iii Creating an Events Log File .................................. 53 Accessing the Events Log File .............................. 54 Updating an Events Log File ................................. 54 Sorting Events ....................................................... 55 Managing Cart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Introduction............................................................ 56 Managing User Access Codes .............................. 56 Creating a Cart Settings File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Introduction............................................................ 58 Cart Settings File Defined ..................................... 58 Procedure.............................................................. 64 Accessing Cart Settings File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Procedure.............................................................. 66 Reading Cart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Introduction............................................................ 67 Procedure.............................................................. 67 Writing Cart Settings to the Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Introduction............................................................ 68 Procedure.............................................................. 68 Modifying a Cart Settings File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Introduction............................................................ 69 Procedure.............................................................. 70 Managing Cart Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Introduction............................................................ 71 Managing General User Access............................ 71 Managing Specific User Access............................ 72 Managing Users on Multiple Carts ........................ 72 Creating a User File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Introduction............................................................ 73 User File Defined................................................... 73 Procedure.............................................................. 78 Accessing a User File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Procedure.............................................................. 79 Reading User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Introduction............................................................ 80 Procedure.............................................................. 80 Writing Users to the Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Introduction............................................................ 81 Procedure.............................................................. 81 Adding a Group of Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Introduction............................................................ 82 Add Group Dialog Box Settings Defined ............... 82 Procedure.............................................................. 84 January 2004
  • 6. iv Adding a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Introduction............................................................ 85 Add User Dialog Box Settings Defined.................. 85 Procedure.............................................................. 87 Modifying a User Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Introduction............................................................ 89 Modifying A User’s Access Settings...................... 89 Modifying a User’s eNarc Access Code Settings .. 91 Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Introduction............................................................ 93 Procedure.............................................................. 93 Chapter 4 Programming the Cart From the Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Contents ................................................................ 95 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Introduction............................................................ 96 Entering Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Introduction............................................................ 97 Procedure.............................................................. 97 Recalling Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Introduction............................................................ 99 General Navigation................................................ 99 Event Master List................................................... 99 Procedure............................................................ 100 Managing Cart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Introduction.......................................................... 101 Managing Access Codes..................................... 101 General Navigation.............................................. 102 Modifying Cart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Introduction.......................................................... 103 Cart Settings Defined .......................................... 103 Procedure............................................................ 108 Managing Cart Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Introduction.......................................................... 119 Managing GENERAL User Access ..................... 119 Managing SPECIFIC User Access...................... 120 General Navigation.............................................. 120 Adding a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Introduction.......................................................... 121 User Access Settings Defined............................. 122 Procedure............................................................ 124 Modifying User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Introduction.......................................................... 127 January 2004
  • 7. v Modifying A User’s Code Access Settings .......... 127 Modifying a User’s eNarc Access Code Settings 129 Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Introduction.......................................................... 131 Procedure............................................................ 131 Appendix A Event Master List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Event Codes........................................................ 133 Appendix B Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 General Tips........................................................ 137 Restarting Your Cart............................................ 137 Appendix C Setup Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Cart Settings........................................................ 139 Default User Sheet .............................................. 141 January 2004
  • 8. vi January 2004
  • 9. -1 1 1 Overview Contents About This Guide ............................................................................... 2 Introduction ....................................................................... 2 Documentation Conventions............................................. 3 Cart Overview ..................................................................................... 4 Cart Features/Components .............................................. 4 Keypad Buttons and Functions......................................... 5 Connector Panel Parts and Functions .............................. 7 Cart User Types and Responsibilities............................... 8 Override Rights................................................................. 8 Terms and Definitions....................................................... 9 Pre-Configured Settings ................................................... 11 January 2004
  • 10. 2 About This Guide Overview About This Guide Introduction Your Artromick® Avalo AC Medication Cart features state-of-the-art engineering that combines a flexible design with easy-to-use access and security features. This guide describes how to program and use the cart. This guide is divided into the following chapters/appendices: Overview: This chapter applies to all users. It contains overview information about the cart, its features, and the roles and responsibilities of its users. It also describes type conventions used throughout the document and terms you must understand to interact with the cart. Using the Cart: This chapter applies to all users. The chapter describes various access methods, how to test the cart’s battery, how to secure the cart, and how to use the Override Code to restock the cart. This chapter also describes how to use some of the cart’s optional features. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software: This chapter applies to cart administrators. The chapter describes how to use the Avalo Advantage Cart Host software to recall events; to add, delete, and edit user access profiles; and to edit the cart’s settings. Programming the Cart From the Cart: This chapter applies to cart administrators. The chapter describes how to use the cart to recall events; to add, delete, and edit user access profiles; and to edit the cart’s settings. Appendix A: Event Master List: This appendix applies to cart administrators. The appendix provides a detailed description of event-related codes that display on the cart’s liquid crystal display (LCD) or in the Cart Host software with regard to the cart’s audit tracking system. Appendix B: Troubleshooting: This appendix applies to users who perform troubleshooting functions. The appendix provides tips on how to troubleshoot basic cart issues. Appendix C: Setup Guides: This appendix applies to cart administrators. The appendix provides a list of cart and user settings, the default value for the setting, setting options, and whether the setting can be changed using the cart’s keypad. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 11. Overview About This Guide 3 Documentation This document uses different type styles to indicate elements of the cart. The Conventions following table describes the conventions. Convention Description BOLD FACE Indicates a message that displays in the cart’s UPPERCASE LETTERS LCD. Bold face type Bold type indicates: A selection that you are instructed to make or clear by pressing the appropriate number or button on the cart’s key pad A selection that you are instructed to make or clear when you are working with the Cart Host software Italics Used for emphasis or to cross reference topics that contain additional information. January 2004
  • 12. 4 Cart Overview Overview Cart Overview Cart Features/ The Avalo AC Medication Cart is equipped with standard and optional features. Components Standard features include: AutoLock™ Timer: The AutoLock timer monitors cart activity and is programmed to automatically secure the cart whenever the cart remains motionless for a preconfigured relock time interval of 1 to 99 minutes. Easy-to-Edit Settings and Controls: The cart’s display screen near the keypad shows messages, date and time settings, and easy-to-follow user instructions. Event Recall Functionality: Authorized users can track cart activity, including user access and relocking procedures. Flexible Access Methods: Depending on your security needs, users access the cart using an access code, an access card, an access code and an access card, or a key. Multiple User Access Roles: Users are assigned access based on job function. Users with “Admin” access can program and use the cart; users with “Normal” or “Key User” access can use the cart, but cannot program it. Override Code Functionality: The Override Code is assigned to the cart and provides authorized users with a special means of access that bypasses alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms. This function is typically used while the cart is being restocked in the pharmacy. Rechargable Battery: The rechargable, valve-regulated lead acid battery typically supplies the cart with continuous power for approximately five days or 1,000 lock/relock cycles. Reset Button: The Reset button enables you to restart the cart by resetting it, in the event that the cart is not functioning properly. Optional features include: Card Access Options: The card reader accessory provides primary or secondary levels of access. Cart Host Software: The Avalo Advantage Cart Host software package that enables authorized users to easily program the cart and to retrieve event, user profile, and cart settings. eNarc™: Electronic Keyless Narcotic Storage (eNarc) provides code-based access to secured narcotic drawers. Night Light: The night light illuminates the cart’s work area to increase visibility. The amount of time that the light stays on after the cart is secure is adjustable. January 2004
  • 13. Overview Cart Overview 5 Keypad Buttons This section describes the parts and functions of the Avalo AC Medication Cart and Functions keypad. The following diagram illustrates the keypad. Button Name Function Function/ESC This button is recommended for administrator use only. It serves two purposes: Function: Enables an administrator to enter Programming mode, from which he or she can program the cart or use the cart’s audit tracking feature. This button also enables a user with override rights to enter Override mode. ESC: Once an administrator is in Programming mode, he or she can use ESC to exit out of lists and subgroups. Battery This button enables users to test the amount of charge left in the cart’s battery. Light This button turns the optional night light on or off. Secure This button secures the cart. (eNarc) Initiates access to the optional Electronic Keyless Narcotic Storage (eNarc) drawer(s). (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 14. 6 Cart Overview Overview (Contd) Button Name Function Clear This button works like a backspace key on a computer keyboard. This button also resets the AutoLock timer. Numbered Keypad The numbered keypad enables you to enter access codes and to accept or change cart settings. Numbers also enable you to scroll when you are working in Recall Events mode: Use 5 and 8 on the keypad to scroll forward or backward, respectively, through the events in the subgroup one event at a time. Use 2 and 0 on the keypad to scroll forward or backward through five events at a time. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 15. Overview Cart Overview 7 Connector Panel This section describes the parts and functions of the connector panel (AC Parts and Systems Support Panel) located at the rear of the cart. The diagram in the table Functions illustrates the connector panel. Diagram Part Function Cart Access Enables you to restart the cart by Reset Button resetting it, in the event that the cart is not functioning properly. Charge Input The Charge Input is used to attach the battery charger to the cart. Communication The Communication ports are Ports 1 and 2 used for communication with external devices. Port 1: This port is preconfigured for communication with a personal computer for Cart Host software usage. Port 2: This port can be configured to communication with other external devices. 12V Power This outlet can be used to power Output external devices. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 16. 8 Cart Overview Overview Cart User Types Avalo AC Medication Cart users are assigned access privileges based on job and function. User types include: Responsibilities Admin: This user can perform all programming or event recall functions. This user can access all areas of the cart and is responsible for adding new cart users, modifying cart user profiles, and recalling events. Normal: This user (typically a nurse) can access some or all areas of the cart based on privileges the administrator assigns. In addition, the administrator may authorize this user to change his or her own access codes. This user is responsible for dispensing medication and then securing the cart. Key User: Using a key, this user can access most areas of the cart. Override Rights Administrators can assign override rights to each user type. Override rights grant users the use of a special Override Code that is assigned to the cart. The Override Code bypasses the cart’s alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms and is typically used while the cart is being restocked in the pharmacy. Reference For more information, see Using the Override Code on page 30. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 17. Overview Cart Overview 9 Terms and This table describes general terms used in this document. Definitions Term Definition Access Card An optional card-swipe feature that can be used as an additional security requirement or as the primary cart access method. Access Code A four-digit personal identification number (PIN) that provides cart access. This code can be “General” (one access code per cart) or “Specific” (one access code per authorized user or group of users). Cart Host software An optional software package that enables authorized users to program the cart and to retrieve events, user profiles, and cart settings from the cart. Cart Settings File A file that is used with the Cart Host software. This file contains information about cart settings. LCD Liquid Crystal Display. The display screen near the keypad that shows messages, date and time settings, and user instructions. Log File A file that is used with the Cart Host software. This file contains information about events that occurred on the cart. This file can be saved but not modified. Master Code A four-digit numeric code that enables an authorized administrator to program the cart or recall events. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 18. 10 Cart Overview Overview (Contd) Term Definition Narcotic Code A four-digit numeric code that must be entered before an authorized user can open any of the locked eNarc narcotics drawers. Available settings are “General” (one eNarc code per cart) or “Specific” (one eNarc code per authorized user or group of users.) and the following usage rules apply: If the access code is set to “General,” the Narcotics Code must be set to General unless the cart is configured with the access card accessory. If the access code is set to “Specific,” the Narcotics Code can be set to either “General” or “Specific,” depending on your needs. Override Code A four-digit code assigned to the cart that bypasses alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms. Typically, this function is used while the cart is being restocked in the pharmacy. Programming Mode This mode enables an administrator to edit user access, edit cart settings, or recall events. Read Cart The Read Cart button displays in the Cart Host software user interface on the user file, cart settings file, or log file. This button enables an administrator to retrieve events, user profiles, and settings from the cart. Recall Events A cart feature that enables an administrator to track cart activity, including user access and relocking activity. User # A unique, four-digit number that identifies the person using the cart. Unlike an access code, a User # cannot be modified after it is accepted. User File A file that is used with the Cart Host software. This file contains user profile information and can be modified. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 19. Overview Cart Overview 11 (Contd) Term Definition Write Cart The Write Cart button displays in the Cart Host software user interface on the user file and the cart settings file. This button enables an administrator to apply settings changes that were made while using the Cart Host software to the cart. Note User access and cart settings are defined later in this document. If you are using the Cart Host software to set up user access and cart settings, see: Cart Settings File Defined on page 58. User File Defined on page 73. If you are using the cart to set up user access and cart settings, see: User Access Settings Defined on page 122. Cart Settings Defined on page 103. Pre-Configured The Avalo AC Medication Cart is designed to accommodate the various needs Settings and responsibilities of the people who use it. When your cart was initially purchased, Artromick programed it to include settings and user access profiles according to your organization’s specific requests. After delivery, a cart administrator can edit the cart’s settings and user access profiles as needed. See Programming the Cart Using the Host Software on page 35 or Programming the Cart From the Cart on page 95 for more information. January 2004
  • 20. 12 Cart Overview Overview January 2004
  • 21. -13 13 2 Using the Cart Contents Overview ............................................................................................. 14 Introduction ....................................................................... 14 Accessing the Cart ............................................................................. 15 Introduction ....................................................................... 15 Accessing with Access Code Only ................................... 16 Accessing with Access Card Only .................................... 17 Accessing with Code and Access Card ............................ 18 Accessing Using a Key ..................................................... 19 Problems Accessing the Cart ........................................... 19 Testing and Charging the Battery .................................................... 22 Introduction ....................................................................... 22 Testing the battery ............................................................ 22 Charging the Battery......................................................... 23 Securing the Avalo AC Medication Cart .......................................... 24 Introduction ....................................................................... 24 Securing the Cart with the Keypad ................................... 24 Securing the Cart Manually .............................................. 25 Using the AutoLock Timer ................................................................ 26 Introduction ....................................................................... 26 AutoLock Activity .............................................................. 26 Relock Process................................................................. 27 Using eNarc Option ............................................................................ 28 Introduction ....................................................................... 28 Automatic Re-Lock ............................................................................ 28 Alarms and Messages ...................................................... 28 eNarc Access Procedure .................................................. 29 Using the Override Code ................................................................... 30 Introduction ....................................................................... 30 Procedure ......................................................................... 30 Using the Night Light ......................................................................... 32 Turning the light on or off from the keypad ....................... 32 Setting an adjustable timer ............................................... 32 Opening the Rear Access Panel Door .............................................. 33 Introduction ....................................................................... 33 Procedure ......................................................................... 33 January 2004
  • 22. 14 Overview Using the Cart Overview Introduction The procedures in this chapter explain the tasks associated with your everyday use of the Avalo AC Medication Cart. This chapter contains the following topics: Accessing the cart Testing and charging the battery Securing the cart Using the AutoLock Timer Using eNarc option Using the Override Code Using the Night Light Opening the Rear Access Panel Door (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 23. Using the Cart Accessing the Cart 15 Accessing the Cart Introduction The Avalo AC Medication Cart may be configured to use an access card as a primary or secondary cart access method. At start-up, depending on your cart configuration, you will access the cart in one or more of the following ways: Access Method Description Access Code Only Enter a pre-set user access code. For procedural information, see Accessing with Access Code Only on page 16. Access Card Only Swipe your card. For procedural information, see Accessing with Access Card Only on page 17. Access Code and Access Enter a pre-set user access code and swipe Card your card. For procedural information, see Accessing with Code and Access Card on page 18. Key Manually unlock the cart using a key. For procedural information, see Accessing Using a Key on page 19. Complete the appropriate procedure for your Avalo Advantage Medication Cart configuration. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 24. 16 Accessing the Cart Using the Cart Accessing with Complete this procedure to access the cart when it is configured to allow access Access Code with an access code only. Only Note In order to complete the procedure, you must have a valid four-digit access code. If you do not have the necessary access code, contact your cart administrator. Step Action 1 Enter your four-digit access code. Note When you are entering your code, the Clear key works like a backspace key on a keyboard. If you make a mistake while entering your code, press Clear to delete the incorrect digit, and enter the correct number. System Response As you type the code, the LCD displays asterisks for each number. Also, if your KEY BEEP cart setting is set to ON, you’ll hear a beep after each number that you press. Note The cart administrator sets the KEY BEEP cart setting. For more information, see Modifying Cart Settings on page 103. 2 Did you enter the correct code? If yes, the LCD displays the following messages: HELLO! The cart unlocks and starts the AutoLock timer. The LCD displays the following message: ACCESS ALLOWED TIME DATE If no, see Problems Accessing the Cart on page 19. You can now use the cart. For more information about the AutoLock Timer, see Using the AutoLock Timer on page 26. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 25. Using the Cart Accessing the Cart 17 Accessing with Complete this procedure to access the cart using an access card. Access Card Note Only In order to complete the procedure, you must have a programmed user access card. If you do not have the necessary card, contact your cart administrator. Step Action 1 Press Clear. System Response The LCD displays the following message: PLEASE SWIPE CARD 2 Swipe your user access card through the access card slot. System Response Is your access card valid? If yes, the LCD displays the following welcome message: HELLO! JANE DOE The cart unlocks and starts the AutoLock timer. The LCD displays the following message: ACCESS ALLOWED TIME DATE If No, see Problems Accessing the Cart on page 19. You can now use the cart. For more information about the AutoLock Timer, see Using the AutoLock Timer on page 26. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 26. 18 Accessing the Cart Using the Cart Accessing with Complete this procedure to access the cart using a code/card configuration. Code and Note Access Card In order to complete the procedure, you must have a valid four-digit access code and a programmed user access card. If you do not have the necessary access code and card, contact your cart administrator. Step Action 1 Enter your four-digit access code. Note When you are entering your code, the Clear key works like a backspace key on a keyboard. If you make a mistake while entering your code, press Clear to delete the incorrect number, and enter the correct number. System Response As you type the code, the LCD displays asterisks for each number. Also, if your KEY BEEP cart setting is set to ON, you’ll hear a beep after each number that you press. 2 Did you enter the correct code? If yes, the LCD displays the following message: PLEASE SWIPE CARD Go to the next step. If no, see Problems Accessing the Cart on page 19. 3 Swipe your user access card through the access card slot. System Response Is your access card valid? If yes, the LCD displays the following welcome message: HELLO! JANE DOE The cart unlocks and starts the AutoLock timer. The LCD displays the following message ACCESS ALLOWED TIME DATE If no, see Problems Accessing the Cart on page 19. You can now use the cart. For more information about the AutoLock Timer, see Using the AutoLock Timer on page 26. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 27. Using the Cart Accessing the Cart 19 Accessing Using Complete this procedure to access the cart using the key. a Key Note In order to complete the procedure, you must have the proper key to access the cart. If you do not have a key, contact your cart administrator. Step Action 1 Insert the key in the lock core. 2 Push the key in and turn the key to the right. System Response The lock core releases and the LCD displays the following message: KEY ACCESS ALLOWED TIME DATE You can now use the cart. Problems For security purposes, the Avalo AC Medication Cart limits the time period Accessing the in which you may attempt to enter the correct access code and valid access Cart card. When you exceed the time interval, the cart: Reverts to idle mode Secures the cart (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 28. 20 Accessing the Cart Using the Cart The following table describes the process that starts when a user enters in invalid access code or access card. Stage Description 1 The first time you enter an incorrect code or swipe an invalid card, the cart alarm beeps once. System Response The LCD displays the following message: INCORRECT CODE PLEASE RE-ENTER CODE or INVALID CARD PLEASE RE-SWIPE CARD 2 After five seconds, if you do not enter any code or swipe a card, the LCD display clears as the system reverts to idle mode. You or another user may then make a second attempt. 3 At second attempt, if you enter a code or swipe the card and: The code was correct or swiped card was valid, you can continue with Step 1 in the appropriate procedure for your cart configuration: Accessing with Access Code Only on page 16. Accessing with Code and Access Card on page 18. Accessing with Access Card Only on page 17. The code was incorrect code or the swiped card was invalid, the cart’s alarm beeps twice. System Response The LCD displays the following message: INCORRECT CODE PLEASE RE-ENTER CODE IF INCORRECT ALARM WILL SOUND or INVALID CARD PLEASE RE-SWIPE CARD IF INVALID ALARM WILL SOUND (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 29. Using the Cart Accessing the Cart 21 (Contd) Stage Description 4 After five seconds, if you do not enter any code or swipe a card, the LCD display clears as the system reverts to idle mode. You or another user may then make a third attempt. 5 At the third attempt, if you enter a code or swipe the card and: The code was correct or swiped card was valid, you can continue with Step 1 in the appropriate procedure for your cart configuration: Accessing with Access Code Only on page 16. Accessing with Code and Access Card on page 18. Accessing with Access Card Only on page 17. The code was incorrect code or the swiped card was invalid, the LCD displays the following message and the cart alarm beeps continuously for one minute or until you enter a correct access code or swipe a valid card: INCORRECT CODE PLEASE RE-ENTER CODE or INVALID CARD PLEASE RE-SWIPE CARD 6 At the fourth attempt, if you enter a code or swipe the card within the one-minute beeping period and: The code was correct or swiped card was valid, the alarm stops and you can continue with Step 1 in the appropriate procedure for your cart configuration: Accessing with Access Code Only on page 16. Accessing with Code and Access Card on page 18. Accessing with Access Card Only on page 17. The code was incorrect code or the swiped card was invalid, the LCD re-displays the message in Stage 5 and resets the one-minute alarm. The alarm continues beeping until one minute transpires after your last incorrect attempt. After one minute the cart reverts to idle mode. January 2004
  • 30. 22 Testing and Charging the Battery Using the Cart Testing and Charging the Battery Introduction Testing the Avalo AC Medication Cart’s battery is an easy way to ensure that you have enough power to operate the cart. Do not use the Avalo AC Medication Cart when the battery’s charge is low. Typically, the battery supplies power to the keypad and relocking mechanism for approximately five days or 1,000 lock/relock cycles (based on the standard Avalo AC Power System). However, if the battery is low, the cart’s Intelligent Power Management System may discontinue power to non-critical components, such as the night light, to save power for critical components, such as eNarc drawer operation. Power to non-critical components is restored after the battery begins to recharge. When the battery’s charge is depleted, the LCD displays a BATTERY NEEDS RECHARGED SOON warning. Testing the To test the battery, press BATTERY. battery Note If you press BATTERY while the battery is charging, the LCD displays a BATTERY STATUS UNAVAILABLE message. System Response The LCD displays one of the following messages: BATTERY CHARGE IS xx%: Indicates that the battery’s charge is sufficient to operate the cart. BATTERY NEEDS RECHARGED SOON!: The battery’s charge is below a critical level. You must recharge the battery. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 31. Using the Cart Testing and Charging the Battery 23 Charging the If the LCD displays a BATTERY NEEDS RECHARGED SOON message, you Battery must recharge the battery. To recharge the battery, connect the Recharger Unit into the CHARGE outlet. The Charge outlet is located on the back of the Avalo AC Medication cart in the AC Systems Support Panel. Important The battery charge and lock/relock information is based on the standard Avalo AC Power System. If the battery’s charge is completely depleted, fully recharging the unit may take three or more hours. However, to access the cart’s functionality while the battery charges, connect the Recharger Unit to the cart’s charge outlet and to a 110v wall outlet. Allow the battery to recharge for approximately two minutes before you access the cart. January 2004
  • 32. 24 Securing the Avalo AC Medication Cart Using the Cart Securing the Avalo AC Medication Cart Introduction As a cart user, it is extremely important that you secure the Avalo AC Medication cart after each use. When the cart is secured, its lock is retracted, the LCD is blank, and users or unauthorized personnel cannot interact with the cart. The cart is equipped with an AutoLock™ system that enables you to secure the cart manually or by using the keypad. In addition, the cart’s Auto Secure setting automatically secures the cart after a pre-defined length of time. If you have the optional eNarc accessory and you try to secure the cart when an eNarc drawer is open, the cart sounds an alarm. Securing the Complete this procedure to secure the cart using the keypad. Cart with the Keypad Step Action 1 Close all drawers. 2 Press Secure. Note If an alarm sounds, verify that all eNarc drawers are closed tightly. System Response The AutoLock system begins retracting the lock and the LCD displays the following messages: SECURING CART followed by: CART SECURED (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 33. Using the Cart Securing the Avalo AC Medication Cart 25 Securing the Complete this procedure to secure the cart manually. Cart Manually Step Action 1 Close all drawers. 2 Press the lock core into the cart until it engages. System Response The LCD displays the following messages: CART SECURED Followed by: AUTO SECURE RESET January 2004
  • 34. 26 Using the AutoLock Timer Using the Cart Using the AutoLock Timer Introduction When your cart is not in use, it is in idle mode. Once you have unlocked the cart, it automatically starts its AutoLock timer. The timer monitors cart activity and is programmed to automatically secure the cart and revert to idle mode whenever the cart remains motionless for a preconfigured relock time interval of 1 to 99 minutes. The cart administrator sets the AutoLock time interval using the Auto Secure setting. The default setting is five minutes. Reference See Modifying Cart Settings on page 103 for information on setting the preconfigured relock time interval. When the cart auto-secures, you must access the cart following the appropriate cart access instructions for your configuration. Reference For more information, see Accessing the Cart on page 15. AutoLock The cart has two functions related to the AutoLock timer: Activity If the MTN DETECTOR cart setting is not set to OFF and the cart is moved, the AutoLock timer resets and the LCD displays the following message for five seconds: CART MOVED - TIMER RESET If the Clear key is pressed, the timer resets. Note The cart administrator sets the MTN DETECTOR cart setting. For more information, see Modifying Cart Settings on page 103. Each time the preset relock time interval elapses, the cart initiates the relock process. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 35. Using the Cart Using the AutoLock Timer 27 Relock Process The following table describes the relock process. Stage Description 1 When the cart has been inactive for the configured relock time interval, the cart beeps twice. System Response The LCD displays the following message: CART WILL AUTO SECURE IN 10 SECONDS Note To reset the relock time interval, use or move the cart. In this case, the LCD displays the following message: ACCESS ALLOWED TIME DATE 2 The LCD shows the 10-second countdown by changing the display every two seconds. System Response The LCD displays the following messages accordingly: CART WILL AUTO SECURE IN 8 SECONDS CART WILL AUTO SECURE IN 6 SECONDS And so forth. 3 When the countdown elapses, the cart relock alarm beeps four times. System Response The LCD displays the following message. CART IS AUTO SECURING 4 The cart locks (the lock core retracts). System Response The LCD displays the following message: CART SECURED 5 The cart reverts to idle mode. January 2004
  • 36. 28 Using eNarc Option Using the Cart Using eNarc Option Introduction Electronic Keyless Narcotic Storage (eNarc) is an optional accessory that provides secure, code-based access to specific narcotic drawers. Depending on your cart, an administrator can assign a user a four-digit access code to narcotics drawer 1, narcotics drawer 2, or both, as applicable. Automatic When accessing a narcotics drawer, the cart enables you to have open access to Re-Lock the drawer for four seconds before re-locking. When you open an eNarc narcotics drawer, the cart displays the following message: NARC DRAWER OPEN Note If you fail to open a drawer within four seconds of initiating access, the drawer automatically re-locks itself. Reference See eNarc Access Procedure on page 29 for instructions for accessing eNarc drawers. Alarms and In the event of a narcotics drawer access error or an error in securing the cart, Messages audible alarms sound and the LCD displays messages indicating the error. These messages include: Message Description PLEASE CLOSE You attempted to secure the cart or the cart NARCOTICS DRAWER attempted to auto-secure while the drawer was open. . SECURE DRAWER.CODE You attempted to access to the eNarc drawers REQD FOR ACCESS without using a valid access code. PLEASE CLOSE You repeatedly attempted to access the drawer SECURE DRAWER without a valid access code. This message is accompanied by a continuous audible warning. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 37. Using the Cart Using eNarc Option 29 eNarc Access Complete this procedure to access the eNarc drawers. Procedure Step Action 1 Access the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Cart on page 15. 2 Press the eNarc key ( ) to initiate access. System Response The LCD displays the following message: ENTER NARCOTIC DRAWER CODE 3 Enter your four-digit narcotics code. Note If you do not have a valid narcotics code, contact your administrator. 4 Do one of the following: If the LCD displays the following message: NARCOTIC DRAWER PRESS 1 OR 2 Go to the next step. If the eNarc drawer clicks and opens, go to step 6. 5 Enter the number of drawer to access. System Response The LCD displays the following message: NARC ACCESS ALLOWED 6 After you are finished accessing the drawer contents, close the narcotics drawer. System Response The LCD displays the following message: NARCOTICS DRAWER IS SECURE 7 Secure the cart or continue with other tasks. January 2004
  • 38. 30 Using the Override Code Using the Cart Using the Override Code Introduction Administrators can assign override rights, which grant users the use of a special Override Code assigned to the cart. The Override Code bypasses the cart’s alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms and is typically used while the cart is being restocked in the pharmacy. Procedure Complete the following procedure to use the Override Code. Step Action 1 Access the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Cart on page 15. 2 Press Function. System Response The LCD displays the following message: ENTER CART OVERRIDE MODE? 1-YES, 2-NO Note If override rights are not assigned, the LCD displays one of the following messages: CHANGE CODE or NO PERSONAL EDITING ALLOWED 3 Press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: PLEASE ENTER OVERRIDE CODE (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 39. Using the Cart Using the Override Code 31 Step Action 4 Enter your Override Code. System Response The LCD displays the following message: OVRRD. ACCESS ALLOWED Note If you do not have a valid override code, contact your administrator. 5 Restock the cart. 6 Close all drawers. 7 Secure the cart manually or press SECURE. January 2004
  • 40. 32 Using the Night Light Using the Cart Using the Night Light Turning the light To to turn the light on or off, press Light. on or off from Note the keypad If the cart’s battery charge is low, the cart’s night light may shut off to conserve power. To resume power to the night light, recharge the battery. For more information, see Charging the Battery on page 23. Setting an In Programming Mode, an administrator can edit the cart’s light time interval adjustable timer setting to automatically turn off after the cart is secure. The length of time is adjustable from 01 minute to 99 minutes. The default time that the light stays on after the cart is secure is 01 minute. For procedural information, see Modifying Cart Settings on page 103. January 2004
  • 41. Using the Cart Opening the Rear Access Panel Door 33 Opening the Rear Access Panel Door Introduction Depending on your cart’s configuration, you may need to open the rear access panel door to access optional accessories, such as the internal trash bin. Procedure Complete the following procedure to open the cart’s rear access panel door. Step Action 1 Face the back of the cart and locate the round black button on the right side panel, in the center area. 2 Push the button. A spring releases the button outward so that it now works like a knob. 3 Turn the knob to the right. The door panel releases so that you can pull it open. January 2004
  • 42. 34 Opening the Rear Access Panel Door Using the Cart January 2004
  • 43. -35 35 3 Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Contents Overview ............................................................................................. 38 Introduction ....................................................................... 38 System Requirements ...................................................... 38 Event, User, and Cart Setting Files .................................. 39 Read Cart and Write Cart Functionality ............................ 39 Arranging Open Files........................................................ 39 Installing the Host Software .............................................................. 40 Procedure ......................................................................... 40 Accessing the Host Software ............................................................ 42 Procedure ......................................................................... 42 Connecting the Host Software to the Cart ....................................... 43 Introduction ....................................................................... 43 Connection Stages ........................................................... 43 Preparing Your Cart.......................................................... 44 Connecting Your PC or Laptop to the Cart ....................... 46 Configuring COM Port Settings ........................................ 47 Closing the Host Software Connection ............................................ 49 Introduction ....................................................................... 49 Closing the Host Software Connection Using the Cart................................................................... 49 Closing the Host Software Connection Using the Software ........................................................... 50 Recalling Events Using Host Software ............................................ 51 Introduction ....................................................................... 51 Event Master List .............................................................. 51 Events Log File Defined ................................................... 51 Creating an Events Log File ............................................. 53 Accessing the Events Log File.......................................... 54 Updating an Events Log File ............................................ 54 Sorting Events .................................................................. 55 Managing Cart Settings ..................................................................... 56 Introduction ....................................................................... 56 Managing User Access Codes ......................................... 56 (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 44. 36 Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Creating a Cart Settings File ..............................................................58 Introduction....................................................................... 58 Cart Settings File Defined ................................................ 58 Procedure......................................................................... 64 Accessing Cart Settings File .............................................................66 Procedure......................................................................... 66 Reading Cart Settings ........................................................................67 Introduction....................................................................... 67 Procedure......................................................................... 67 Writing Cart Settings to the Cart .......................................................68 Introduction....................................................................... 68 Procedure......................................................................... 68 Modifying a Cart Settings File ...........................................................69 Introduction....................................................................... 69 Procedure......................................................................... 70 Managing Cart Users ..........................................................................71 Introduction....................................................................... 71 Managing General User Access....................................... 71 Managing Specific User Access....................................... 72 Managing Users on Multiple Carts ................................... 72 Creating a User File ............................................................................73 Introduction....................................................................... 73 User File Defined.............................................................. 73 Procedure......................................................................... 78 Accessing a User File .........................................................................79 Procedure......................................................................... 79 Reading User Information ..................................................................80 Introduction....................................................................... 80 Procedure......................................................................... 80 Writing Users to the Cart ...................................................................81 Introduction....................................................................... 81 Procedure......................................................................... 81 Adding a Group of Users ...................................................................82 Introduction....................................................................... 82 Add Group Dialog Box Settings Defined .......................... 82 Procedure......................................................................... 84 (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 45. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software 37 Adding a New User .............................................................................85 Introduction....................................................................... 85 Add User Dialog Box Settings Defined............................. 85 Procedure......................................................................... 87 Modifying a User Profile .....................................................................89 Introduction....................................................................... 89 Modifying A User’s Access Settings................................. 89 Modifying a User’s eNarc Access Code Settings ............. 91 Deleting a User ....................................................................................93 Introduction....................................................................... 93 Procedure......................................................................... 93 January 2004
  • 46. 38 Overview Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Overview Introduction Avalo Advantage Cart Host software enables administrators to read information from the cart and to program the cart. The benefits of using the Cart Host software include: The ability to specify the names of users Increased speed in performing tasks, such as adding users After the software is installed and set up, administrators can connect to the cart to retrieve user, cart setting, and event data. Administrators can also use the software to modify, add, or delete users and cart settings and then apply (write) any data changes to the cart. Note Although using the Cart Host software is the recommended method, you can also program the cart from the cart. For more information, see Programming the Cart From the Cart on page 95. System In order to install and run the Cart Host software, your PC or laptop must be Requirements equipped with the following minimum requirements: Windows® 98, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000 SP3, or Windows® XP Pentium or higher processor VGA or higher resolution screen supported by Microsoft Corporation 32 MB of RAM An open serial port (COM 1 to COM 8 are supported) A mouse or other pointing device (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 47. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Overview 39 Event, User, and The Cart Host software uses three types of files to manage the cart’s data. The Cart Setting Files types of files are: Event Log File: An event log file (*.log) is a read-only file that contains events that occurred on the cart. The system’s Read Cart functionality retrieves events from the cart and then populates the log file. The log file can include approximately 4,000 events; the most recent event displays at the end of the file. You can sort the order in which events display on the log file or print the log file, depending on your needs. User File: A user file (*.usr) contains user profile and access information. The system’s Read Cart functionality retrieves user information from the cart; the system’s Write Cart functionality enables you to apply changes that you make in the file to the cart. Cart Settings File: A cart settings file (*.crt) contains all of the settings on the cart. The system’s Read Cart functionality retrieves cart setting information from the cart; the system’s Write Cart functionality enables you to apply changes that you make in the file to the cart. Read Cart and The Cart Host software’s Read Cart functionality enables you to retrieve events, Write Cart user profiles, and settings from the cart. You can save the data that you retrieve in Functionality log files, user files, or cart setting files, which you can access using the Cart Host software. The Write Cart functionality enables you to apply changes that you make to a user file or a cart settings file to the cart. The Write Cart functionality is not applicable to log files, which are view-only lists of events that occurred on the cart. Use of the Read Cart and Write Cart functionality enables you to view the cart’s current data and to ensure that the data stored by the Cart Host software and the data stored on the cart remain in sync. Arranging The Cart Host software’s Cascade feature enables you to arrange open files in a Open Files tiered order for easier viewing. To use the Cascade feature, select Cascade from the Window menu. January 2004
  • 48. 40 Installing the Host Software Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Installing the Host Software Procedure Complete the following procedure to install the Cart Host software. Note Depending on the current version of your operating system, the Setup wizard may prompt you to upgrade your software. Click Yes, and the Avalo Advantage Cart Host software program performs this operation. Step Action 1 Start Microsoft® Windows®. 2 Close all open applications. 3 Insert the Avalo Cart Host CD into your PC or laptop’s CD-ROM drive. 4 On the Windows taskbar, click Start. 5 Click Run... System Response The Run dialog box displays. 6 Type the following: D:setup.exe Note If your CD-ROM is not located on the D drive, substitute the appropriate drive letter. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 49. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Installing the Host Software 41 (Contd) Step Action 7 Press OK. System Response The Setup wizard begins to copy files and then displays a prompt recommending that you close applications that may be running. 8 Click OK. System Response The Setup wizard displays a destination directory dialog box. 9 Do you want to install the Artromick Avalo Cart Host software to the default destination directory? Note The default directory location is: C:Program FilesArtromickAvaloHost If yes, click the button that contains a computer image. If no, Click Change Directory. Type or navigate to the desired path location. Click OK. System Response Installation begins. The Setup wizard displays a Choose Program Group dialog box. 10 Do you want to use the default Program Group? Note The default Program Group is Artromick. If yes, click Continue. If no, Type the name of the Program Group that you want to use. Click Continue. System Response The Setup wizard begins installing Data Access components. After installation is complete, the Setup wizard displays a message indicating that setup was successful. 11 Click OK. January 2004
  • 50. 42 Accessing the Host Software Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Accessing the Host Software Procedure Complete the following procedure to access the Cart Host software. Step Action 1 On the Windows taskbar, click Start. 2 Did you install the Cart Host software in the default destination directory? Note The default directory location is: C:Program FilesArtromickAvaloHost If yes, Point to Programs. Point to Artromick. Point to Avalo Cart Host. If no, Depending on your operating system, use File Manager or Windows Explorer to navigate to the Artromick directory location you selected. Double-click to open the directory. Double-click to open the Avalo Host folder. Double-click CartHost. System Response The Cart Host software opens. January 2004
  • 51. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Connecting the Host Software to the Cart 43 Connecting the Host Software to the Cart Introduction Before you can use the Cart Host software, you must: Prepare the cart Configure settings in the Cart Host software (first time only) Connect your PC or laptop to the cart. The procedures in this section provide step-by-step instructions for completing these tasks. Connection This table describes the stages that you must complete in order to connect to the Stages cart using the Cart Host software. This table also describes when to complete the task. Stage Description When Do I Do This? 1 Prepare the cart for connection by opening Each time you want to a Host link on the cart. use the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Preparing Your Cart on page 44. 2 Connect your PC or laptop to the cart using Each time you want to the adapter cord that came with your use the Cart Host Software Connection Kit. software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting Your PC or Laptop to the Cart on page 46. 3 Configure Communications (COM) Port The first time you use settings in the Cart Host software to match the Cart Host software COM port settings on your PC or laptop. only. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Configuring COM Port Settings on page 47. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 52. 44 Connecting the Host Software to the Cart Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Preparing Your Complete the following procedure to prepare your cart for connection. Cart Note You must complete the following procedure each time you use the Cart Host software. Step Action 1 On the cart, press Function. System Response The LCD displays the following message: PROGRAMMING MODE? 1-YES 2-NO 2 Press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays one of the following messages: PLEASE ENTER ACCESS CODE or PLEASE SWIPE CARD 3 Do one of the following: If your cart’s configuration requires an access code only: Enter your access code. Go to the next step. If your cart’s configuration requires an access card only: Swipe your card. Go to the next step. If your cart’s configuration requires an access code and an access card: Enter your access card. Swipe your card. Go to the next step. Note If you enter a code that is not assigned to an administrator, the system prompts you to re-enter the code or to re-swipe your card, as applicable. If you find that your code does not work, contact your supervisor. System Response The LCD displays the following message: PLEASE ENTER CART MASTER CODE (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 53. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Connecting the Host Software to the Cart 45 (Contd) Step Action 4 Enter your cart’s master code. System Response The LCD displays the following message: 1-RECALL EVENTS 2-EDIT PROGRAM Note If your cart’s master code is not valid, the LCD prompts you to re-enter the code until the correct code is entered. If you find that your code does not work, contact your supervisor. 5 Press 1 (RECALL EVENTS). System Response The LCD displays the following message: REVIEW EVENTS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 6 Press 2 (No). System Response The LCD displays the following message: LINK TO HOST? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 7 Press 1 (Yes). System Response The LCD displays the following message: LINK TO HOST OPEN Note This link remains open until you close it. For step-by-step instructions on closing the connection, see Closing the Host Software Connection on page 49. You must now connect your PC or laptop to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting Your PC or Laptop to the Cart on page 46. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 54. 46 Connecting the Host Software to the Cart Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Connecting Your Complete the following procedure to connect your PC or laptop to the cart using PC or Laptop to the cart’s adapter cable. the Cart Note You must complete the following procedure each time you use the Cart Host software. Step Action 1 Plug one end of the adapter cord that came with your cart into a Communication port on the back of your cart. Note The cart includes two communication ports. These ports are located on the back of the Avalo AC Medication cart in the Communication section of the connector panel (AC Systems Support Panel). The ports are labeled “1” and “2.” Port 1 is typically configured for use with the Cart Host software. Reference For more information, see Connector Panel Parts and Functions on page 7. 2 Plug the other end of the adapter cord into the correct serial port on your PC or laptop. If this is the first time you are using the Cart Host software, you must configure the Cart Host software COM port settings. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Configuring COM Port Settings on page 47. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 55. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Connecting the Host Software to the Cart 47 Configuring Use this procedure to configure the COM port settings in the Cart Host software to COM Port match COM port settings on your PC or laptop. This configuration enables you to Settings connect to the cart through the COM port on your PC or laptop. Note The Cart Host software saves your COM port settings. Therefore, you only need to complete the following procedure the first time you use the software. Step Action 1 If necessary, start Windows on your PC or laptop. 2 View your PC or laptop’s Communications (COM) Port settings. Make note of the following settings: Port name (COM 1, COM 2, etc.) Bits per Second (baud rate) Parity Data Bits Stop Bits You will need to know these settings later in this procedure. Note To view your Communication Port settings in Windows 98 or in Windows 2000, open the Device Manager. Double-click Ports (COM&LPT). Double-click the COM port that you want to use. Select the Port Settings tab. For assistance, contact your information systems department. Reference For information on opening Device Manager, consult your Windows online Help system. 3 Open the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 4 From the File menu, select Com Port Setup. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Com Setup dialog box. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 56. 48 Connecting the Host Software to the Cart Programming the Cart Using the Host Software (Contd) Step Action 5 View the default settings that display on the dialog box. Note The default settings are typically configured correctly. 6 Refer to the values that you wrote down in step 2 of this procedure and make adjustments as needed. 7 Click OK. System Response The Cart Host software saves your COM port settings and the Com Setup dialog box closes. You can now use the Cart Host software. January 2004
  • 57. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Closing the Host Software Connection 49 Closing the Host Software Connection Introduction After you finish using the Cart Host software, you must close the connection link between your cart and the software before you can use the cart for other tasks. When the link to the Cart Host software is open on the cart, the cart’s LCD displays the following message: LINK TO HOST OPEN In addition, when the cart and Cart Host software are communicating, a status message displays in the software at the bottom of the user file, cart settings file, or log file. You can close the connection link using either the cart or the Cart Host software. The procedures for both methods are described in the following sections. Closing the Host Complete the following procedure to close the Cart Host software connection Software using the cart. Connection Using the Cart Step Action 1 From the cart, press ESC. System Response The LCD briefly displays the cart’s identification information followed by a blank screen. 2 Disconnect the cart’s adapter cable from the back of your PC or laptop. 3 Disconnect the adapter cable from the back of the cart, if desired. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 58. 50 Closing the Host Software Connection Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Closing the Host Complete the following procedure to close the Cart Host software connection Software using the software. Connection Using the Step Action Software 1 From the File menu, select Exit. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Exit Host dialog box asking whether you want to disconnect from the cart. 2 Click Yes. System Response The software closes. The LCD briefly displays the cart’s identification information followed by a blank screen. Note If you click No on the Exit Host dialog box, the Cart Host software closes, but the cart’s LCD still displays: LINK TO HOST OPEN 3 Disconnect the cart’s adapter cable from the back of your PC or laptop. 4 Disconnect the adapter cable from the back of the cart, if desired. January 2004
  • 59. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Recalling Events Using Host Software 51 Recalling Events Using Host Software Introduction The cart stores almost 4,000 events in its memory. Depending on the number of events generated each day, the cart memory may contain events from several weeks back. Using the Host software, you can “Read” events that occur on the cart and then save those events to a log file. In addition, you can open log files that you create to view previous events and sort the events that display on the log file. Event Master The Cart Host software log file uses codes to indicate events. The meanings of List the events codes are detailed in the Event Master List. You can use the Event Master List as a reference guide when viewing events. Reference For more information, see Appendix A, "Event Master List," in this guide. Events Log File The following table describes the fields on the log file. Defined Note When you open a new log file, it contains blank fields. After you press the Read Cart button, the Cart Host software populates the log file with codes indicating events from the cart. Field Name Definition SN Cart serial number. Name Cart name. Time Time that the log file was read from the cart. Date Date that the log file was read from the cart. Code Type A General or Specific value, which indicates the type of access code that cart requires. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 60. 52 Recalling Events Using Host Software Programming the Cart Using the Host Software (Contd) Field Name Definition Secure Time The cart’s auto secure delay setting. This is the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the cart secures itself. You can adjust this setting, which can be set from 01 minute to 99 minutes, using the Cart Host software or from the cart. This number must be in a two-digit format. The default setting is 05 minutes. Personal A YES or NO value, which indicates whether the user has Editing personal editing capabilities. Num A number indicating the order in which events occurred. The lowest number is the oldest event; the highest number is the newest event. The log file can display approximately 4,000 events. Event The name of the event. Note To view event-related codes, see Appendix A, "Event Master List," in this guide. ID The ID assigned to the event. Name If the cart’s Access Code setting is configured as Specific, meaning the cart is configured for multiple users, this field displays the name of person who accessed the cart. Time The time that the event occurred. Date The date that the event occurred. Description Description of the event that occurred. Read Cart Instructs the software to read events from the cart. Close Exits the Cart Host software. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 61. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Recalling Events Using Host Software 53 Creating an Complete the following procedure to create a new events log file using the Cart Events Log File Host software. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 3 From the File menu, select New. 4 Select Log File. System Response The Cart Host software opens a new, blank log file. 5 Click Read Cart. System Response The Cart Host software reads the cart and populates the log file with events that occurred. 6 From the File menu, select Save. System Response The Save dialog box displays. 7 Type a log file name followed by a .log extension. 8 Click Save. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 62. 54 Recalling Events Using Host Software Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Accessing the Complete the following procedure to access the events log file. Events Log File Step Action 1 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 2 From the File menu, select Open>Log File. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Open dialog box. 3 Select or navigate to the events log file. Note An events log file contains a .log extension. The default file location is: C:Program FilesArtromickAvaloHost 4 Click Open. System Response The Cart Host software displays the events log file. Updating an Complete the following procedure to update an events log file. Events Log File Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 63. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Recalling Events Using Host Software 55 (Contd) Step Action 3 Open the events log file. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Events Log File on page 54. 4 Click Read Cart. System Response The Cart Host software reads the events from the cart and updates the log file. 5 From the File menu, select Save. System Response The Save dialog box displays. 6 Select the name of the existing log file or type a new log file name followed by a .log extension. 7 Click Save. Sorting Events By default, log file events are arranged numerically according to the order in which they occurred on the cart. The lowest number in the Num column of the log file indicates the oldest event; the highest number indicates the most recent event. The column headings on the log file are interactive to enable you to sort by category. For example, to sort by date, double-click the Date column heading on the log file. The Cart Host software rearranges the log file so that all events that occurred on the cart display according to the date. January 2004
  • 64. 56 Managing Cart Settings Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Managing Cart Settings Introduction Your cart’s settings are configured based on your organization’s requirements and the preconfigured setup of your cart. The Cart Host software’s cart settings file provides an easy way for you to modify these settings as the needs of your organization change or to better fit your working environment. For example, if you work in an environment of high activity in which the cart is frequently bumped or moved, you can modify the Mtn Detector (Motion Detector) field on the cart settings file to decrease the cart’s level of sensitivity. If you work in an area that requires high security, you may want to adjust the Alarm/Beeper Level field on the cart settings file to a higher auditory level, and so forth. Before you modify the cart settings file, it is important to use the Read Cart functionality to ensure that you are viewing the cart’s current settings. After you modify the cart settings file, it is important to use the Write Cart functionality to ensure that the system applies the changes you made to the cart. Managing User You can configure your cart user codes two ways: General and Specific. The Access Codes setting for user codes displays in the User Codes section of the cart settings page, where the Type drop-down list contains the General and Specific options. A General configuration means that your cart is configured for use with one access code. Therefore, if more than one user is accessing the cart using the code, you cannot track individual activity. A Specific configuration means that your cart is configured to have multiple access codes. Each user must be assigned a unique (specific) access profile so that you can track individual user activity using the Cart Host software log file. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 65. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Managing Cart Settings 57 If you have the optional eNarc accessory, the configuration defined in the Type drop-down list affects what settings display in the Narcotics section of the user interface. If the Type field in the User Codes section is set to General, the Code Type field in the Narcotics section must also be General, unless the cart is equipped with the access card accessory. If the Type field in the User Codes section is set to Specific, the Code Type field in the Narcotics section can be set to either General or Specific, depending on your needs. Note The cart saves all settings and user access profiles that are used with Specific configurations. Therefore, as your needs change, you can switch between Specific and General configurations without having to re-enter user profiles. January 2004
  • 66. 58 Creating a Cart Settings File Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Creating a Cart Settings File Introduction A cart settings file (*.crt) contains all of the settings on the cart. This file contains Read Cart and Write Cart functionality so that you can retrieve settings from the cart or apply the setting changes that you make in the Cart Host software user interface to the cart. Cart Settings File The following table describes the fields on the cart settings file. Defined Note When you open a new cart settings file, it contains blank fields. After you press the Read Cart button, the Cart Host software populates the file with settings from the cart. Field Name Definition Cart Section Serial No. Serial number assigned to the cart. Note You cannot modify this field. HW/FW Rev Hardware/firmware version or revision. Note You cannot modify this field. Users/Events Users and events currently in the cart. Note You cannot modify this field. Name Name of the cart. Number Number assigned to the cart. Time/Date Section Cart The time and date that display on the cart. The Read Time button reads the cart’s current time and date. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 67. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Creating a Cart Settings File 59 (Contd) Field Name Definition PC The time and date on the PC or laptop that is connected to the cart. The Set Time button enables you to type the current time and/or date and then set them. Auto Secure Section Delay Controls the cart’s auto secure delay setting, which is the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the cart secures itself. This setting can be from 1 minute to 99 minutes. Mtn Detector Controls the cart’s auto-relock motion detector sensitivity. The default setting is 5 (level 5). Available settings are Off and the range of 1 to 10. Level 10 is the most sensitive. Personal Editing Section Allowed Controls whether users can change their own access codes. Available options are No and Yes. Warning If a user with personal editing capabilities selects an access code that is already in use, the cart’s LCD displays a CODE NOT AVAILABLE message, which could potentially compromise the security of your medication cart. To eliminate this possibility, do not allow personal editing. Cart Codes Section Cart Master Master code assigned to the cart. This code must be a four-digit number. Cart Override This field displays the Override Code. The Override Code is a four-digit code assigned to the cart. The code bypasses alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms. Typically, this function is used while the cart is being restocked in the pharmacy. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 68. 60 Creating a Cart Settings File Programming the Cart Using the Host Software (Contd) Field Name Definition Light Timeout Section Note: This setting only applies to the optional night light accessory. Minutes Number of minutes the cart’s optional night light stays on after the cart secures. The default number of minutes is 1. Available settings are 1 to 99 minutes. Alarm/Beeper Section Level Controls the tone of your cart’s beeper. The default beeper level is Med (medium). Available levels are: Off, Low, Med, and High. Alarm Enable Controls the alarm on the cart. A selected check box indicates that the alarm is on. Narc 1 Alarm Controls the cart’s eNarc alarm setting on narcotics drawer 1. A selected check box indicates that the alarm Note is on. This setting only applies to users who have the eNarc optional accessory. Narc 2 Alarm Controls the cart’s eNarc alarm setting on narcotics drawer 2. A selected check box indicates that the alarm Note is on. This setting only applies to users who have the eNarc optional accessory with two drawers. Key Beep Indicates whether the cart emits beeps when a user presses keys on the keypad. A selected check box indicates that the alarm is on. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 69. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Creating a Cart Settings File 61 (Contd) Field Name Definition User Code Section Type Controls the type of user access code that the cart requires. Available settings are General or Specific. General means that the cart is configured for only one code. Therefore, if more than one user is accessing the cart using a single code, individual activity cannot be tracked. Specific means that the cart is configured for use by multiple users or groups. When Specific is selected, you must add users and assign each a unique four-digit access code. If you have the optional eNarc accessory, the Type setting affects which options display in the Code Type drop-down list in the Narcotics section. General Code Controls the general access code required to access the cart. If Specific is selected from the Type drop- down list, this field is not available. Always Required Indicates whether an access code is also required when using the access card accessory. A selected check box indicates that a user must use an access code in addition to the access card accessory. A cleared check box indicates that the user does not need to use an access code when using the access card accessory. This check box is used in conjunction with the Custom Port check box. If None is selected in the Custom Port check box, the Always Required check box is not available. Narcotics Section Note: These settings only apply to users who have the eNarc optional accessory. Num Drawers Controls which eNarc drawers users can access. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 70. 62 Creating a Cart Settings File Programming the Cart Using the Host Software (Contd) Field Name Definition Code Type Controls the type of narcotics code that a user must enter to access eNarc drawers. Available options depend on the Type setting that you selected in the User Code section. If you selected General, you must use a General code type, unless the cart is equipped with the access card accessory. If you selected Specific, you can specify a code type that is General or Specific (each user is assigned a unique Narc Code). General Code This field controls the general code required to access the eNarc. If Specific is selected from the Code Type drop-down list, this field is not available. Com Port Setup Section WARNING: Adjusting these settings could negatively impact your ability to access the Cart Host software and/or the cart. Do not adjust this setting without first consulting Artromick Technical Support. Host Port Controls the port that the cart uses with the Cart Host software. Click Setup to adjust the Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bit, and Stop Bit settings. WARNING Adjusting this setting could negatively impact your ability to access the Cart Host software and/ or the cart. Do not adjust this setting without first consulting Artromick Technical Support. Printer Port Controls the port that the cart uses to connect to a printer. Click Setup to adjust the Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bit, and Stop Bit settings. WARNING Adjusting this setting could negatively impact your ability to access the Cart Host software and/ or the cart. Do not adjust this setting without first consulting Artromick Technical Support. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 71. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Creating a Cart Settings File 63 (Contd) Field Name Definition Custom Port Controls the port that the cart uses for the access card accessory. Click Setup to adjust the Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bit, and Stop Bit settings. WARNING Adjusting this setting could negatively impact your ability to access the Cart Host software and/ or the cart. Do not adjust this setting without first consulting Artromick Technical Support. Buttons Read Cart Instructs the software to read data from the cart and then populate the cart settings file with the cart’s data. Note You must be connected to the cart in order to use this functionality. For more information, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. Write Cart Instructs the software to write the cart settings you modified to the cart. Note You must be connected to the cart in order to use this functionality. For more information, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. Close Exits the Cart Settings file. January 2004
  • 72. 64 Creating a Cart Settings File Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new cart settings file. Reference For field and description information, see Cart Settings File Defined on page 58. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 3 From the File menu, select New. 4 Select Cart Settings. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Cart Settings New dialog box. 5 Click Read Cart. System Response The Cart Host software reads the cart’s current settings and then populates the new cart settings file based on those settings. 6 Modify the settings as necessary. Note You are not able to modify dimmed fields or selections. 7 From the File menu, select Save. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Save As dialog box. 8 From the Save In drop-down list, navigate to the location where you want to save the file. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 73. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Creating a Cart Settings File 65 (Contd) Step Action 9 Type the name of the cart settings file followed by a .crt extension. 10 Click Save. System Response The Host software saves the file. January 2004
  • 74. 66 Accessing Cart Settings File Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Accessing Cart Settings File Procedure Complete the following procedure to access a cart settings file. Step Action 1 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 2 From the File menu, select Open>Cart Settings. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Open dialog box. 3 Select or navigate to the cart settings file. Note The default file location is C:Program FilesArtromickAvaloHost A cart setting file ends with a .crt extension. 4 Click Open. System Response The Cart Host software displays the cart settings file. January 2004
  • 75. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Reading Cart Settings 67 Reading Cart Settings Introduction Before you modify cart settings using the Cart Host software, it is important to make sure that the file you are working in is the most current. If updates have been made to the cart, you must read information from the cart using the Read Cart button that displays in the user file. Procedure Complete the following procedure to read cart settings from the cart. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 3 Open the cart settings file. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing Cart Settings File on page 66. 4 Click Read Cart. System Response The Cart Host software updates cart settings file with the cart’s current settings. 5 From the File menu, select Save. January 2004
  • 76. 68 Writing Cart Settings to the Cart Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Writing Cart Settings to the Cart Introduction After you modify cart settings using the Cart Host software, it is important to update the cart with the newly-modified settings. To do this, you apply the cart settings to the cart using the Write Cart button that displays in the cart settings file. Procedure Complete the following procedure to apply changes to the cart settings file to the cart. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 3 Open the cart settings file. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing Cart Settings File on page 66. 4 Click Write Cart. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Write Cart dialog box, which asks you whether you want to write these settings to the cart. 5 Click Yes. System Response The Cart Host software applies changes made to the cart settings file to the cart. 6 From the File menu, select Save. January 2004
  • 77. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Modifying a Cart Settings File 69 Modifying a Cart Settings File Introduction You can use the Cart Host software to modify the settings that control how your cart works. These settings include: Cart Time/Date Auto Secure Personal Editing Cart Codes Light Timeout Alarm/Beeper User Codes Narcotics Com Port Setup Note Although using the Cart Host software is the recommended method, you can also modify cart settings from the cart. For more information, see Modifying Cart Settings on page 103. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 78. 70 Modifying a Cart Settings File Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify cart settings using the Cart Host software. Reference For field and description information, see Cart Settings File Defined on page 58. Note You are not able to modify dimmed fields or selections. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 3 Open the cart settings file. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing Cart Settings File on page 66. 4 Click Read Cart. System Response The cart settings file is updated with settings from the cart. 5 Modify the cart settings as appropriate. 6 From the File menu, select Save. 7 Click Close. January 2004
  • 79. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Managing Cart Users 71 Managing Cart Users Introduction With regard to user access settings, your cart is configured in one of two ways based on your organization’s requirements and the preconfigured setup of your cart. A General configuration means that your cart is configured for use with one access code. Therefore, if more than one user is accessing the cart using the code, you cannot track individual activity. Your Cart Host software includes a default user file with General user access settings that you can modify as needed. A Specific configuration means that your cart is configured to have multiple access codes. This enables you to track individual users or groups using the Cart Host software log file. Note The type of configuration that your cart uses is specified in the Type drop- down list in the User Codes section of the Cart Settings file. For more information, see Cart Settings File Defined on page 58. The Cart Host software’s user file provides an easy way for you to manage user access settings, regardless of your cart’s configuration. From the file, you can also apply changes that you make to the cart. Managing To manage General user access using the Cart Host software: General User Read the cart to ensure that you are viewing the most current user Access information. Reference For more information, see Reading User Information on page 80. Modify the settings associated with your default user access profile as needed. Reference For more information, see Modifying a User Profile on page 89. Apply changes to the cart. Reference For more information, see Writing Users to the Cart on page 81. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 80. 72 Managing Cart Users Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Managing To manage Specific user access using the Cart Host software: Specific User Create a user file. Access Reference For more information, see Creating a User File on page 73. Read the cart to ensure that you are viewing the most current user information. Reference For more information, see Reading User Information on page 80. Add user profiles as necessary. Reference For more information, see Adding a Group of Users on page 82 or Adding a New User on page 85. Modify users as necessary. Reference For more information, see Modifying a User Profile on page 89. Delete users as necessary. Reference For more information, see Deleting a User on page 93. Apply changes to the cart. Reference For more information, see Writing Users to the Cart on page 81. Managing Users If your organization uses multiple carts that are configured for use with Specific on Multiple Carts access codes, you can manage all users from a master user file. In addition, you can use the Active check box that displays on the Add User or Edit User dialog boxes to control which users are written to a specific cart. A selected Active check box means that the user will be written to the cart. A cleared check box means that the user will not be written to the cart. The results of your selections display in the Active column of the user file. A Yes value in the Active column means that when you write to the cart, the user will be added to the cart. A No value in the column means that when you write to the cart, the user will not be added to the cart. Note If you add a group of users they will, by default, display on the user file as Active. You can modify the user’s status using the Edit User dialog box. For more information, see Modifying a User Profile on page 89. January 2004
  • 81. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Creating a User File 73 Creating a User File Introduction A user file (*.usr) contains a list of cart user profiles. This file contains Read Cart and Write Cart functionality so that you can retrieve user profiles from the cart or apply the changes that you make to the cart. User File Defined The following table describes the fields on the user file. Note When you open a new user file, it contains blank fields. After you press the Read Cart button, the Cart Host software populates the file with user profiles from the cart. In addition, profiles that you enter using the Add Group or Add User dialog boxes also display here. Field Definition ID A unique, four-digit ID that identifies the cart user. You cannot modify this ID. If you need to use the ID again, you must delete the user.Typical IDs include the last four digits of the user’s Social Security Number or the user’s employee number. Note If programming user access settings from the cart, this ID is referred to as the User #. Name Name of the user. Typically, this is entered as the initial of the user’s first name and his or her last name. This field can contain a maximum of 16 characters. Type User Type. A User Type defines basic levels of user access. User Types include: Normal: This User Type enables a user to access specific areas of the cart. This person cannot perform programming or recall functions. This is the default setting. Admin: This User Type enables a user to perform all programming and Recall Event functions and to access all areas of the cart. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 82. 74 Creating a User File Programming the Cart Using the Host Software (Contd) Field Definition Access Code A unique, four-digit PIN that enables a user to access the cart. The access code can be modified. By default, the Cart Host software automatically populates this field, which you can modify when you add or update the user. Override If set to YES, this setting grants users the right to use the Override Code. The Override Code is a four-digit code assigned to the cart. The code bypasses alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms. Typically, this function is used while the cart is being restocked in the pharmacy. Available CART OVERRIDE options are NO or YES. Narc Access The eNarc drawers to which the user has been granted access. Settings include: NONE Note This setting DRW 1 only applies to DRW 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration) users who DRW 1& 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration) have the eNarc optional Note accessory. The location of the eNarc drawers depends on the configuration of your cart. Narc Code A four-digit PIN that enables a user to access the eNarc drawers. By default, the Cart Host software automatically populates this field, which you can modify when you add or update the user. Note The Narc Access setting only applies if the cart is configured with the eNarc optional accessory. Extended ID Code assigned to the user’s access card. Note This setting only applies to users who have the access card optional accessory. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 83. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Creating a User File 75 (Contd) Field Definition Access Code A unique, four-digit PIN that enables a user to access the cart. The access code can be modified. By default, the Cart Host software automatically populates this field, which you can modify when you add or update the user. Override If set to YES, this setting grants users the right to use the Override Code. The Override Code is a four-digit code assigned to the cart. The code bypasses alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms. Typically, this function is used while the cart is being restocked in the pharmacy. Available CART OVERRIDE options are NO or YES. Narc Access The eNarc drawers to which the user has been granted access. Settings include: NONE Note This setting DRW 1 only applies to DRW 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration) users who DRW 1& 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration) have the eNarc optional Note accessory. The location of the eNarc drawers depends on the configuration of your cart. Narc Code A four-digit PIN that enables a user to access the eNarc drawers. By default, the Cart Host software automatically populates this field, which you can modify when you add or update the user. Note The Narc Access setting only applies if the cart is configured with the eNarc optional accessory. Extended ID Code assigned to the user’s access card. Note This setting only applies to users who have the access card optional accessory. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 84. 76 Creating a User File Programming the Cart Using the Host Software (Contd) Field Definition Access Code A unique, four-digit PIN that enables a user to access the cart. The access code can be modified. By default, the Cart Host software automatically populates this field, which you can modify when you add or update the user. Override If set to YES, this setting grants users the right to use the Override Code. The Override Code is a four-digit code assigned to the cart. The code bypasses alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms. Typically, this function is used while the cart is being restocked in the pharmacy. Available CART OVERRIDE options are NO or YES. Narc Access The eNarc drawers to which the user has been granted access. Settings include: NONE Note This setting DRW 1 only applies to DRW 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration) users who DRW 1& 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration) have the eNarc optional Note accessory. The location of the eNarc drawers depends on the configuration of your cart. Narc Code A four-digit PIN that enables a user to access the eNarc drawers. By default, the Cart Host software automatically populates this field, which you can modify when you add or update the user. Note The Narc Access setting only applies if the cart is configured with the eNarc optional accessory. Extended ID Code assigned to the user’s access card. Note This setting only applies to users who have the access card optional accessory. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 85. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Creating a User File 77 (Contd) Field Definition Active Indicates whether the user can be written to the cart. Yes means that when you write to the cart, the user will be added to the cart. No means that when you write to the cart, the user will not be added to the cart. Note You can use this feature to manage users on multiple carts. For more information, see Managing Users on Multiple Carts on page 72. Read Cart Instructs the software to read the user information that is currently stored on the cart. Use of this feature ensures that your user file contains the same information as the cart. Note You must be connected to the cart in order to use this functionality. For more information, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. Write Cart This button enables you to write changes that you make in the user file to the cart. Use of this feature ensures that your user file contains the same information as the cart. Note You must be connected to the cart in order to use this functionality. For more information, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. Add Group This button displays the Add Group dialog box, which enables you to add multiple users simultaneously. Add User This button displays the Add User dialog box, which enables you to add a new user to the user file. Delete User This button displays the Delete User dialog box, which enables you to delete a selected user. Close This button closes the user file. Note If the user file contains unsaved changes, the Cart Host software prompts you to save the file before the software closes. January 2004
  • 86. 78 Creating a User File Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new user file. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 3 From the File menu, select New. 4 Select User File. System Response The Cart Host software displays a blank user file. 5 Click Read Cart. System Response The Cart Host software reads the cart’s current user profiles and then populates the new user file based on those settings. 6 From the File menu, select Save. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Save As dialog box. 7 From the Save In drop-down list, navigate to the location where you want to save the file. 8 Type the name of the user file followed by a .usr extension. 9 Click Save. System Response The Cart Host software saves the file. January 2004
  • 87. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Accessing a User File 79 Accessing a User File Procedure Complete the following procedure to access a user file. Step Action 1 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 2 From the File menu, select Open>User File. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Open dialog box. 3 Select or navigate to the user file. Note The default file location is: C:Program FilesArtromickAvaloHost A user file contains a .usr extension. 4 Click Open. System Response The Cart Host software displays the user file. January 2004
  • 88. 80 Reading User Information Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Reading User Information Introduction Before you add or modify user profiles using the Cart Host software, it is important that the file you are working from is the most current. If updates have been made to the cart, you must read information from the cart using the Read Cart button that displays in the user file. Procedure Complete the following procedure to read user information from the cart. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 3 Open the user file. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing a User File on page 79. 4 Click Read Cart. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Read Cart dialog box asking you whether you want to replace all users in the current data base. 5 Click Yes. System Response The Cart Host software updates user file with the cart’s current user profiles. 6 From the File menu, select Save. January 2004
  • 89. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Writing Users to the Cart 81 Writing Users to the Cart Introduction After you add or modify user profiles using the Cart Host software, it is important to update the cart to include the users that you added or modified. To do this, you apply the user information to the cart using the Write Cart button that displays in the user file. Procedure Complete the following procedure to write user information to the cart. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 3 Click Write Cart. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Write Cart dialog box asking you whether you want to replace all users in the cart. 4 Click Yes. System Response The Cart Host software applies changes made to the user file to the cart. 5 From the File menu, select Save. January 2004
  • 90. 82 Adding a Group of Users Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Adding a Group of Users Introduction The Add Group button on the user file enables you to add a large number of cart users simultaneously. When you add a group of users, you select a Start ID and an End ID range for the group. By default, the Cart Host software automatically populates these fields, which you can modify with IDs that are not in use. However, after you click OK on the dialog box, the IDs cannot be modified. The settings that you assign on the Add Group dialog box apply to all users in the group. After you create the group, its members display individually on the user file. Add Group The following table describes the Add Group dialog box. Dialog Box Note Settings Defined These settings display when you click the Add Group button in the user file. Field Definition Start ID A unique, four-digit ID that applies to the first user in the group that you are creating. By default, the Cart Host software automatically populates this field, which you can modify with an ID that is not in use. After you click OK on this dialog box, the ID field cannot be modified. However, if you need to use the ID again, you can delete the user. End ID A unique, four-digit ID that applies to the last user in the group that you are creating. By default, the Cart Host software automatically populates this field, which you can modify with an ID that is not in use. After you click OK on this dialog box, the ID field cannot be modified. However, if you need to use the ID again, you can delete the user. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 91. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Adding a Group of Users 83 (Contd) Field Definition User Type A User Type defines basic levels of user access. User Types include: Normal: This User Type enables a user to access specific areas of the cart. This person cannot perform programming or recall functions. This is the default setting. Admin: This User Type enables a user to perform all programming and Recall Event functions and to access all areas of the cart. Narc Access Controls eNarc drawer access options for a group of users. Settings include: NONE Note This setting only DRW 1 applies to users who DRW 2 (if applicable to the cart’s have the eNarc configuration) optional accessory. DRW 1& 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration) Note The location of the eNarc drawers depends on the configuration of your cart. Cancel Cancels the Add Group function. OK Saves the information that you typed and closes the Add Group dialog box. January 2004
  • 92. 84 Adding a Group of Users Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a group of users using the Cart Host software. Reference For field and description information, see Add Group Dialog Box Settings Defined on page 82. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 3 Open the user file. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing a User File on page 79. 4 Click Add Group. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Add Users dialog box. 5 Type the Start ID and the End ID for the range of users that you want to include in this group. 6 Modify the User Type and access settings as appropriate. 7 Click OK. System Response The Cart Host software updates the user file to include the new users based on the ID range that you specified. 8 From the File menu, select Save. Important It is important that the information contained in the Cart Host software user file is the same information that is stored on the cart (and vice versa). Therefore, you should apply changes that you make to the cart. For more information, see Writing Users to the Cart on page 81. January 2004
  • 93. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Adding a New User 85 Adding a New User Introduction The Add User button on the user file enables you to add one user at a time to the file. After you add a user, the user displays on the user file. Add User The following table describes the fields on the Add User dialog box. Dialog Box Note Settings Defined These settings display when you click the Add User button in the user file. Field Definition ID A unique, four-digit ID that identifies the cart user. By default, the Cart Host software automatically populates this field, which you can modify with an ID that is not in use. However, after you click OK on the dialog box, you cannot modify the ID. If you need to use the ID again, you must delete the user. Typical IDs include the last four digits of the user’s Social Security Number or the user’s employee number. Note If programming user access settings from the cart, this ID is referred to as the User #. Active Indicates whether the user can be written to the cart. A selected check box means that when you write to the cart, the user will be added to the cart. A cleared check box means that when you write to the cart, the user will not be added to the cart. Note You can use this check box to manage users on multiple carts. For more information, see Managing Users on Multiple Carts on page 72. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 94. 86 Adding a New User Programming the Cart Using the Host Software (Contd) Field Definition Name Name of the user. Typically, this is entered as the initial of the user’s first name and his or her last name. This field can contain a maximum of 16 characters. Override A selected check box grants users the right to use the Override Code. The Override Code is a four-digit code that is assigned to the cart. The code bypasses alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms. Typically, this function is used while the cart is being restocked in the pharmacy. User Type Defines basic levels of user access. User Types include: Normal: This User Type enables a user to access specific areas of the cart. This person cannot perform programming or recall functions. This is the default setting. Admin: This User Type enables a user to perform all programming and Recall Event functions and to access all areas of the cart. Access Code A unique, four-digit PIN that enables a user to access the cart. By default, the Cart Host software automatically populates this field, which you can modify to meet your needs. Narc Access Controls eNarc drawer access options that you can grant to a user. Settings include: NONE Note This setting only DRW 1 applies to users who DRW 2 (if applicable to the cart’s have the eNarc configuration) optional accessory. DRW 1& 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration) Note The location of the eNarc drawers depends on the configuration of your cart. January 2004
  • 95. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Adding a New User 87 (Contd) Field Definition Narc Code A four-digit PIN that enables a user to access the eNarc drawers. By default, the Cart Host software automatically populates this field, which you can modify to meet your needs. Note The Narc Access setting only applies if the cart is configured with the eNarc optional accessory. Extended ID Code assigned to the user’s access card. Note This setting only applies to users who have the access card optional accessory. OK Saves the information that you typed and closes the Add User dialog box. Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a new user to a user file. Reference For field and description information, see Add User Dialog Box Settings Defined on page 85. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 96. 88 Adding a New User Programming the Cart Using the Host Software (Contd) Step Action 3 Open the user file. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing a User File on page 79. 4 Read the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Reading User Information on page 80. 5 Click Add User. System Response The Add User dialog box displays. 6 Type the appropriate user information. 7 Click OK. System Response The Add User dialog box closes and the user file displays with the user added to the file. Important It is important that the information contained in the Cart Host software user file is the same information that is stored on the cart (and vice versa). Therefore, you should apply changes that you make to the cart. For more information, see Writing Users to the Cart on page 81. January 2004
  • 97. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Modifying a User Profile 89 Modifying a User Profile Introduction This section describes how to modify user access settings, including: Access code settings eNarc access code settings (if applicable) Modifying A Complete the following procedure to modify a user’s access settings using the User’s Access Cart Host software. Settings Note You are not able to modify dimmed fields or selections. Reference For field and description information, see User File Defined on page 73. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 3 Open the user file. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing a User File on page 79. 4 Read the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Reading User Information on page 80. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 98. 90 Modifying a User Profile Programming the Cart Using the Host Software (Contd) Step Action 5 Double-click the appropriate user whose access settings you want to modify. System Response The Cart Host software displays the Edit User dialog box. 6 Modify the access settings as appropriate. 7 Click OK. System Response The Edit User dialog box closes and the user file displays with the modified user. 8 From the File menu, select Save. Important It is important that the information contained in the Cart Host software user file is the same information that is stored on the cart (and vice versa). Therefore, you should apply changes that you make to the cart. For more information, see Writing Users to the Cart on page 81. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 99. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Modifying a User Profile 91 Modifying a Complete the following procedure to modify a user’s eNarc access using the Cart User’s eNarc Host software. Access Code Note Settings You are not able to modify dimmed fields or selections. Reference For field and description information, see User File Defined on page 73. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 3 Open the user file. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing a User File on page 79. 4 Read the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Reading User Information on page 80. 5 Double-click the appropriate user whose eNarc settings you want to modify. System Response The Edit User dialog box displays. 6 Modify the Narc Access and/or Narc Code settings as appropriate. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 100. 92 Modifying a User Profile Programming the Cart Using the Host Software (Contd) Step Action 7 Click OK. System Response The Edit User dialog box closes and the user file displays with the modified user. 8 From the File menu, select Save. Important It is important that the information contained in the Cart Host software user file is the same information that is stored on the cart (and vice versa). Therefore, you should apply changes that you make to the cart. For more information, see Writing Users to the Cart on page 81. January 2004
  • 101. Programming the Cart Using the Host Software Deleting a User 93 Deleting a User Introduction If your cart requires Specific access codes, you can use the Cart Host software to delete user profiles that you add to the cart. Note The type of configuration (General or Specific) that your cart uses is specified in the Cart Host software cart settings file. For more information, see Modifying a Cart Settings File on page 69. Procedure Complete the following procedure to delete a user using the Cart Host software. Step Action 1 Connect to the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Connecting the Host Software to the Cart on page 43. 2 Access the Cart Host software. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing the Host Software on page 42. 3 Open the user file. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Accessing a User File on page 79. 4 Read the cart. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Reading User Information on page 80. 5 Click to highlight the user that you want to delete. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 102. 94 Deleting a User Programming the Cart Using the Host Software (Contd) Step Action 6 Click Delete User. System Response The Cart Host software displays a message asking you whether you are sure you want to delete the user. 7 Click Yes. System Response The Cart Host software deletes the user from the user file. 8 From the File menu, select Save. Important It is important that the information contained in the Cart Host software user file is the same information that is stored on the cart (and vice versa). Therefore, you should apply changes that you make to the cart. For more information, see Writing Users to the Cart on page 81. January 2004
  • 103. -95 95 4 Programming the Cart From the Cart Contents Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Entering Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Recalling Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 General Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Event Master List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Managing Cart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Managing Access Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 General Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Modifying Cart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Cart Settings Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Managing Cart Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Managing GENERAL User Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Managing SPECIFIC User Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 General Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Adding a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 User Access Settings Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Modifying User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Modifying A User’s Code Access Settings . . . . . . . . 127 Modifying a User’s eNarc Access Code Settings . . . 129 Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 January 2004
  • 104. 96 Overview Programming the Cart From the Cart Overview Introduction The procedures in this chapter explain how to program the Avalo AC Medication Cart from the cart. This chapter contains the following topics: Entering Programming Mode Recalling Events Managing Cart Settings Managing Cart Users January 2004
  • 105. Programming the Cart From the Cart Entering Programming Mode 97 Entering Programming Mode Introduction Programming Mode enables authorized users to: Recall events (if applicable) Modify user access Modify cart settings Note Depending on your cart’s configuration, you must have a valid access code and/or a valid access card, as well as the valid cart master code to access the cart in Programming Mode. Reference See Terms and Definitions on page 9 for information about the different types of access codes. Procedure You must enter programming mode with the cart in an idle state. If the cart is in use before you begin this procedure, secure the cart before beginning the procedure. Complete the following procedure to enter Programming Mode. Step Action 1 Press Function. System Response The LCD displays the following message: PROGRAMMING MODE? 1-YES 1-NO 2 Press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: PLEASE ENTER ACCESS CODE or PLEASE SWIPE CARD (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 106. 98 Entering Programming Mode Programming the Cart From the Cart (Contd) Step Action 3 Do one of the following: If your cart’s configuration requires an access code only: Enter your access code. Go to the next step. If your cart’s configuration requires an access card only: Swipe your card. Go to the next step. If your cart’s configuration requires an access code and an access card: Enter your access card. Swipe your card. Go to the next step. Note If you enter a code that is not assigned to an administrator, the system prompts you to re-enter the code or to re-swipe your card, as applicable. If you find that your code does not work, contact your supervisor. System Response The LCD displays the following message: PLEASE ENTER CART MASTER CODE 4 Enter your cart’s master code. System Response The LCD displays the following message: 1-RECALL EVENTS 2-EDIT PROGRAM Note If your cart’s master code is not valid, the LCD prompts you to re-enter the code until the correct code is entered. If you find that your code does not work, contact your supervisor. January 2004
  • 107. Programming the Cart From the Cart Recalling Events 99 Recalling Events Introduction Recall Events Mode is an audit tracking system that enables authorized users to review up to 4,000 of the past events starting with the most recent. Recall Events Mode identifies users associated with the event and the time and date of that event. Recall Events Mode is a non-edit mode. To edit user access or cart settings, you must exit Recall Events Mode and then proceed to Edit Program Mode. For more information, see Adding a User on page 121 or Modifying Cart Settings on page 103. General Recall Events Mode is set up in a hierarchical system that includes the following Navigation main headings: PRINT EVENTS REVIEW EVENTS EXIT RECALL When viewing a main heading, press 2 (NO) to advance to the next main heading in Recall Events Mode. Press 1 (YES) to advance further into a heading’s subgroup. When in the REVIEW EVENTS subgroup, use 5 and 8 on your keypad to scroll forward or backward, respectively, through the events in the subgroup one event at a time. Use 2 and 0 on your keypad to scroll forward or backward through five events at a time. To exit, press ESC one or more times to navigate to the EXIT RECALL main heading, and press 1 (YES). Event Master The Event Master List provides a detailed description of event-related codes that List display on the LCD. You can use the Event Master List as a reference guide when viewing events on the LCD. Reference For more information, see the appendix, "Event Master List," in this guide. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 108. 100 Recalling Events Programming the Cart From the Cart Procedure Complete the following procedure to recall events. Note: To exit recall events, press ESC and then press 1 (YES). Step Action 1 Enter Programming Mode. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Entering Programming Mode on page 97. System Response The LCD displays the following message: 1-RECALL EVENTS 2-EDIT PROGRAM 2 Press 1 (RECALL EVENTS). System Response The LCD displays the following: REVIEW EVENTS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 3 Do you want to review events? If yes, press 1 (YES). Use the 5 (Forward) and 8 (Backward) keys on your keypad to scroll one event at a time or use the 2 and 0 keys on your keypad to scroll through five events at a time. Press ESC to exit. If no, press 1 (NO). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EXIT RECALL? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 4 Do you want to exit event recall? If yes, press 1 (YES). If no, press 1 (NO). Repeat the steps in this procedure as needed. System Response The LCD displays the following message: 1-RECALL EVENTS 2-EDIT PROGRAM January 2004
  • 109. Programming the Cart From the Cart Managing Cart Settings 101 Managing Cart Settings Introduction Your cart’s settings are configured based on your organization’s requirements and the preconfigured setup of your cart. You can modify these settings as the needs of your organization change or to better fit your working environment. For example, if you work in an environment of high activity in which the cart is frequently bumped or moved, you may choose to decrease the level of sensitivity on the cart’s motion detector (MTN DETECTOR). If you work in an area that requires high security, you may want to adjust the cart’s alarm to a higher auditory level, and so forth. Managing The Access Code setting on your cart is configured as GENERAL or SPECIFIC. Access Codes A GENERAL configuration means that your cart is configured for use with one access code. Therefore, if more than one user is accessing the cart, you cannot track individual activity. A SPECIFIC configuration means that your cart is configured to have multiple users or a group. Each user must be assigned a unique access profile so that you can track individual user activity using the Event Recall functionality. If you have the optional eNarc accessory, your Access Code configuration affects which NARC CODE settings can be used: If your Access Code is set to GENERAL, your NARC CODE setting must also be GENERAL. If your Access Code is set to SPECIFIC, your NARC CODE setting can be set to either GENERAL or SPECIFIC depending on your needs. Note The cart saves all settings and user access profiles that are used with SPECIFIC configurations. Therefore, as your needs change, you can switch between SPECIFIC and GENERAL configurations without having to re-enter user profiles. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 110. 102 Managing Cart Settings Programming the Cart From the Cart General When you access the cart settings feature, the system displays all of the settings Navigation in the LCD as a continuous list. To move through the list in order to view settings and navigate to a specific setting, press 1 (ACCEPT) to advance in the list to the next setting without changing the current setting. When you display the last setting selection, press 1 (ACCEPT) to return to the beginning of the list. You can repeat this process as many times as needed. Reference See Procedure on page 108 for the steps involved in changing the settings. January 2004
  • 111. Programming the Cart From the Cart Modifying Cart Settings 103 Modifying Cart Settings Introduction You can modify the settings that control how your cart works. These settings include: Beeper Level Alarm Narc Alarm 1 Narc Alarm 2 Key Beep Auto Secure Motion Detector Access Code Narc Code Cart Master Code Personal Editing Time Date Light on Time Interval Custom Port Reference See Cart Settings Defined on page 103 for a complete description of the settings. Cart Settings The following table describes the user access settings that you can define or Defined modify. Setting Name Definition BEEPER LEVEL This setting controls the tone of your cart’s beeper. The default beeper level is MEDIUM. Available levels are: OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 112. 104 Modifying Cart Settings Programming the Cart From the Cart (Contd) Setting Name Definition ALARM This setting controls the alarm on the cart. The default setting is ALARM ON. Available settings are: ALARM ON or ALARM OFF. NARC 1 ALARM This setting controls the cart’s eNarc (Electronic Keyless Narcotic Storage) alarm setting on narcotics drawer 1. This is an optional accessory. The default setting is NARC 1 ALARM ON. Available settings are: NARC 1 ALARM ON or NARC 1 ALARM OFF. NARC 2 ALARM This setting controls the cart’s eNarc alarm setting on narcotics drawer 2. This is an optional accessory. The default setting is NARC 2 ALARM ON. Available settings are: NARC 2 ALARM ON or NARC 2 ALARM OFF. KEY BEEP This setting controls whether the cart emits beeps when a user presses keys on the keypad. The default setting is KEY BEEP ON. Available settings are: KEY BEEP ON and KEY BEEP OFF. AUTO SECURE This setting controls the cart’s auto secure delay setting, which is the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the cart secures itself. Use the keypad to adjust this setting, which can be set from 01 minute to 99 minutes. This number must be in a two-digit format. The default setting is 05 minutes. MTN DETECTOR This setting controls the cart’s auto-relock motion detector sensitivity. The default setting is LVL5 (level 5). Available settings are OFF and the range of LVL 1 to LVL 10. LVL10 is the most sensitive. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 113. Programming the Cart From the Cart Modifying Cart Settings 105 (Contd) Setting Name Definition ALARM This setting controls the alarm on the cart. The default setting is ALARM ON. Available settings are: ALARM ON or ALARM OFF. NARC 1 ALARM This setting controls the cart’s eNarc (Electronic Keyless Narcotic Storage) alarm setting on narcotics drawer 1. This is an optional accessory. The default setting is NARC 1 ALARM ON. Available settings are: NARC 1 ALARM ON or NARC 1 ALARM OFF. NARC 2 ALARM This setting controls the cart’s eNarc alarm setting on narcotics drawer 2. This is an optional accessory. The default setting is NARC 2 ALARM ON. Available settings are: NARC 2 ALARM ON or NARC 2 ALARM OFF. KEY BEEP This setting controls whether the cart emits beeps when a user presses keys on the keypad. The default setting is KEY BEEP ON. Available settings are: KEY BEEP ON and KEY BEEP OFF. AUTO SECURE This setting controls the cart’s auto secure delay setting, which is the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the cart secures itself. Use the keypad to adjust this setting, which can be set from 01 minute to 99 minutes. This number must be in a two-digit format. The default setting is 05 minutes. MTN DETECTOR This setting controls the cart’s auto-relock motion detector sensitivity. The default setting is LVL5 (level 5). Available settings are OFF and the range of LVL 1 to LVL 10. LVL10 is the most sensitive. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 114. 106 Modifying Cart Settings Programming the Cart From the Cart (Contd) Setting Name Definition ACCESS CODE This setting controls the type of user Access Code that the cart requires. Available settings are GENERAL or SPECIFIC. GENERAL means that the cart is configured for use with one access code. Therefore, if more than one user is accessing the cart, individual activity cannot be tracked. SPECIFIC means that the cart is configured for use by multiple users or groups. When the SPECIFIC is selected, you must add users and assign each a unique four- digit Access Code. If you have the optional eNarc accessory, the Access Code setting affects which NARC CODE options display. NARC CODE This setting controls the type of narcotics code that a user must enter to access eNarc drawers. Available options depend on which type of Access Code you select. If you select a GENERAL Access Code, you must use a GENERAL NARC CODE, unless the cart is equipped with the access card accessory. If you select a SPECIFIC Access Code, you can specify a NARC CODE that is GENERAL or SPECIFIC (each user is assigned a unique NARC CODE). CHG CART MASTER CODE This setting enables an administrator to change the master code assigned to the cart. This code must be a four-digit number. PERSONAL EDITING This setting controls whether non-administrator users can change their own access codes. TIME This setting controls the time the system displays on the LCD. This setting displays as two digits for each hour (HH) and two digits for each minute (MM). (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 115. Programming the Cart From the Cart Modifying Cart Settings 107 (Contd) Setting Name Definition DATE This setting controls the date the system displays on the LCD. The date displays as two digits for each month (MM), Day (DD), and year (YY). For example, for January 1, 2003, you enter 010103. LIGHT ON This setting controls the number of minutes that the cart’s optional night light stays on after the cart is secure. The default number of minutes is 01. Available settings are 01 to 99 minutes. Custom Port This setting controls the port that the cart uses for the access card accessory. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 116. 108 Modifying Cart Settings Programming the Cart From the Cart Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify cart settings. Note In System Response sections of this table, “XXX” or “XX” represent your cart’s current setting. Press ESC to exit to cart settings. Step Action 1 Enter Programming Mode. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Entering Programming Mode on page 97. System Response The LCD displays the following message: 1-RECALL EVENTS 2-EDIT PROGRAM 2 Press 2 (EDIT PROGRAM). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT USER ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 3 Press 2 (NO). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT CART SETTINGS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 4 Press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: BEEPER LEVEL XXX 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 117. Programming the Cart From the Cart Modifying Cart Settings 109 (Contd) Step Action 5 Do you want to change the beeper level? Note If the beeper level is set to OFF, this setting overrides all other beeper settings and turns off all audible indicators. If yes, press 2 (CHG) until the LCD displays the beeper level that you want (OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH), and press 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: ALARM XX 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG 6 Do you want to change the cart’s alarm setting (ON or OFF)? If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays one of the following messages depending on your cart’s options. NARC ALARM XX 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG Go to the next step. NARC 1 ALARM XX 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG Go to the next step. KEY BEEP XX 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG Go to Step 9. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 118. 110 Modifying Cart Settings Programming the Cart From the Cart (Contd) Step Action 7 Do you want to change the cart’s eNarc alarm setting for drawer 1 (ON or OFF)? If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays one of the following messages depending on your cart’s options: NARC 2 ALARM XX 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG Go to the next step. KEY BEEP XX 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG Go to Step 9. 8 Do you want to change the cart’s eNarc alarm setting for drawer 2 (ON or OFF)? If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: KEY BEEP XX? 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG 9 Do you want to change your cart’s key beep setting (ON or OFF)? If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: AUTO SECURE XX MINUTES 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 119. Programming the Cart From the Cart Modifying Cart Settings 111 (Contd) Step Action 10 Do you want to change the cart’s auto secure interval setting? If yes: Press 2 (CHG). System Response The LCD displays the following message: AUTO SECURE _ _ MIN USE KEYPAD TO CHANGE Enter a 2-digit number between 01 and 99 minutes. System Response When you enter two digits, the LCD displays the value you enter and re-displays 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG. If you enter the wrong value, you can repeat this task as many times as needed by pressing 2 (CHG) and entering a new value. Press 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: MTN DETECTOR XXXX 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG 11 Do you want to adjust the cart’s auto-relock motion detector (MTN DETECTOR) sensitivity (1-10 and OFF)? If yes, press 2 (CHG) until the LCD displays the setting level that you want, and press 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: ACCESS CODE XXXX 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 120. 112 Modifying Cart Settings Programming the Cart From the Cart (Contd) Step Action 12 Do you want to change the cart’s type of access code setting (GENERAL or SPECIFIC)? Warning If your users have individual user access codes and you change the setting from SPECIFIC to GENERAL, the users will not be able to access the cart. Conversely, if you want to change the cart’s type of access code from GENERAL to SPECIFIC, you must add new users and assign each user a specific access code before they can access the cart. See Adding a User on page 121. If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays one of the following messages depending on your cart options: NARC CODE XXX 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG Go to the next step. CHG CART MASTER CODE 1-NO 2-CHG Go to Step 15. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 121. Programming the Cart From the Cart Modifying Cart Settings 113 (Contd) Step Action 13 If applicable, do you want to change cart’s type of eNarc access code (SPECIFIC or GENERAL)? Warning If your users have individual eNarc access codes and you change the setting from SPECIFIC to GENERAL, the users will not be able to access the eNarc drawers with their SPECIFIC eNarc access code. Conversely, if you want to change the cart’s type of eNarc access code from GENERAL to SPECIFIC, you must add new users and assign each user a specific eNarc access code before they can access the eNarc drawers. See Adding a User on page 121. If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: PERSONAL EDITING XX 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG 14 Do you want to allow personal editing to enable cart users to change access codes (NO or YES)? Warning If a user with personal editing capabilities selects an access code that is already in use, the LCD displays a CODE NOT AVAILABLE message, which could potentially compromise the security of your medication cart. To eliminate this possibility, do not allow personal editing. If yes, press 2 (CHG) and 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: CHG CART MASTER CODE 1-NO 2-CHG (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 122. 114 Modifying Cart Settings Programming the Cart From the Cart (Contd) Step Action 15 Do you want to change the cart’s master code? Warning If you change the master code, be sure to provide the new code to any administrators who need it to perform their required activities. If yes: Press 2 (CHG). System Response The LCD displays the following message: ENTER NEW CART MASTER CODE _ _ _ _ Enter a new master code. System Response The LCD displays the following message: ACCEPT XXXX AS NEW CODE? 1-YES, 2-NO Press 1 (YES). If no, press 1 (NO). System Response The LCD displays the following message: CHG OVERRIDE CODE? 1-NO 2-CHG (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 123. Programming the Cart From the Cart Modifying Cart Settings 115 (Contd) Step Action 16 Do you want to change the cart’s override code? Warning If you change the override code, be sure to provide the new code to any users who need it to perform their required activities. If yes: Press 2 (CHG). System Response The LCD displays the following message: ENTER NEW OVERRIDE CODE _ _ _ _ Enter a new override code. System Response The LCD displays the following message: ACCEPT XXXX AS NEW CODE? 1-YES, 2-NO Press 1 (YES). If no, press 1 (NO). System Response The LCD displays the following message: TIME _ _: _ _ [displays time] 1- ACCEPT 2-CHG (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 124. 116 Modifying Cart Settings Programming the Cart From the Cart (Contd) Step Action 17 Do you want to change the time that displays in the LCD? If yes: Press 2 (CHG). System Response The LCD displays the following message: TIME _ _:_ _AM USE KEYPAD TO CHANGE Enter the new time in HH:MM format. System Response The LCD displays the following message: 1-ACCEPT, 2-AM, 3-PM Press 1 (ACCEPT), 2 (AM) or 3 (PM), as appropriate. Press 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: DATE _ _ / _ _ / _ _ [displays date] 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 125. Programming the Cart From the Cart Modifying Cart Settings 117 (Contd) Step Action 18 Do you want to change the date that displays in the LCD? If yes: Press 2 (CHG). System Response The LCD displays the following message: DATE _ _/_ _/_ _ USE KEYPAD TO CHANGE Enter the new date in MM/DD/YY format. System Response The LCD displays the following message: 1-ACCEPT, 2-CHG Press 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following messages depending on your cart options: LIGHT ON FOR XX MIN. 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG Go to the next step. CUSTOM PORT SETTING XXX? 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG Go to step 20. BEEPER LEVEL XXX 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG You have proceeded through the end of the settings and are back at the beginning of the list. Go to Step 21. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 126. 118 Modifying Cart Settings Programming the Cart From the Cart (Contd) Step Action 19 Do you want to change the amount of time that the night light stays on after the cart secures (01 - 99 MIN)? If yes: Press 2 (CHG). System Response The LCD displays the following message: LIGHT ON FOR _ _ MIN 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG Enter the new time in two-digit format. Press 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: CUSTOM PORT SETTING XXX? 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG 20 Do you want to change the custom port setting (NONE, COM1, COM2, COM 3)? WARNING Adjusting this setting could negatively impact your ability to access the Cart Host software and/or the cart. Do not adjust this setting without first consulting Artromick Technical Support. If yes, press 2 (CHG) until the LCD displays the setting that you want, and press 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: BEEPER LEVEL XXX? 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG 21 Press ESC to exit cart settings or repeat the procedure to modify any cart settings. January 2004
  • 127. Programming the Cart From the Cart Managing Cart Users 119 Managing Cart Users Introduction With regard to user access settings, your cart is configured in one of two ways based on your organization’s requirements and the preconfigured setup of your cart. A GENERAL configuration means that your cart is configured for use with one access code. Therefore, if more than one user is accessing the cart, you cannot track individual activity. Your cart is preconfigured to include default GENERAL user access settings that you can modify as needed. A SPECIFIC configuration means that your cart is configured to have multiple user profiles. In this case, you must add user profiles to the cart and assign each user or group of users a unique user access profile. This enables you to track individual user activity using the Recall Events functionality. The type of configuration that your cart uses is specified in the ACCESS CODE section of your cart settings. Reference See Modifying Cart Settings on page 103 for more information. Managing To manage GENERAL access, you can modify the settings associated with your GENERAL User default user access profile. Access Reference See Adding a User on page 121 for more information. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 128. 120 Managing Cart Users Programming the Cart From the Cart Managing To manage SPECIFIC users, you must: SPECIFIC User Add user profiles as necessary. Access Reference See Adding a User on page 121 for more information. Modify users as necessary. Reference See Adding a User on page 121 for more information. Delete users as necessary. Reference See Adding a User on page 121 for more information. General When you access user settings for a given user, the LCD displays all of the user’s Navigation settings in a list. To move through the list in order to view settings and navigate to a specific setting, press 1 (ACCEPT) to advance in the list to the next setting without changing the current setting. When you display the last setting selection, press 1 (ACCEPT) to return to the beginning of the list. You can repeat this process as many times as needed. To change a setting currently displayed, press 2 (CHG), enter new information (if applicable), and then press 1 (ACCEPT). To scroll backward through the setting selection list, press ESC. January 2004
  • 129. Programming the Cart From the Cart Adding a User 121 Adding a User Introduction If your cart is configured for SPECIFIC access, you must add a profile for each user. When you add a user, you define: User # User Type Cart Override Access Code NARC Access DWR (This setting only applies to carts which have the eNarc optional accessory) NARC Code (This setting only applies to carts which have the eNarc optional accessory) Creating this profile enables you track individual activity using the Recall Events functionality. Note The type of configuration (GENERAL or SPECIFIC) that your cart uses is specified in the ACCESS CODE section of your cart settings. For more information, see Modifying Cart Settings on page 103. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 130. 122 Adding a User Programming the Cart From the Cart User Access The following table describes the user access settings. The settings are listed in Settings Defined the table as the cart displays them in the LCD list. Setting Definition USER # A unique, four-digit number that identifies the cart user. After a User # is entered and accepted, it cannot be modified. USER TYPE A User Type defines basic levels of user access. User Types include: Normal: This User Type enables a user to access specific areas of the cart. This person cannot perform programming or recall functions. This is the default setting. Admin: This User Type enables a user to perform all programming and Recall Event functions and to access all areas of the cart. CART OVERRIDE If set to YES, this setting grants users the right to use the Override Code. The Override Code is a four-digit code that is assigned to the cart. The code bypasses alarms, timers, and relocking mechanisms. Typically, this function is used while the cart is being restocked in the pharmacy. Available CART OVERRIDE options are NO or YES. ACCESS CODE An Access Code is a unique, four-digit PIN that enables a user to access the cart. The Access Code can be modified. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 131. Programming the Cart From the Cart Adding a User 123 (Contd) Setting Definition NARC ACCESS DWR NARC ACCESS DWR enables an administrator to assign access to secured, eNarc drawers and then further specify which Note drawer(s) by selecting one of the following: This setting only NONE applies to carts which have the eNarc DRW 1 optional accessory. DRW 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration) DRW 1& 2 (if applicable to the cart’s configuration) Note The location of the eNarc drawers depends on the configuration of your cart. NARC CODE A NARC CODE is a unique, four-digit number that provides access to the secured eNarc Note drawer(s). This setting only applies to carts which have the eNarc optional accessory and NARC ACCESS DWR access. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 132. 124 Adding a User Programming the Cart From the Cart Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a user. Step Action 1 Enter Programming Mode. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Entering Programming Mode on page 97. System Response The LCD displays the following message: 1-RECALL EVENTS 2-EDIT PROGRAM 2 Press 2 (EDIT PROGRAM). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT USER ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 3 Press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: ADD NEW USER? 1-YES, 2-NO 4 Press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: ENTER NEW USER # 5 Enter a unique, four-digit User #. Note The User # identifies the user. The User # is not the same as an access code and cannot be modified after it is accepted. For simple programming, however, the User # can be the same four-digit number as the Access Code that you assign later in this procedure. System Response The LCD displays the following message: USER TYPE NORMAL? 1-YES 2-CHG (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 133. Programming the Cart From the Cart Adding a User 125 (Contd) Step Action 6 Do you want to make this user an administrator? If yes: Press 2 (CHG) Press 1 (YES) Press 1 (ACCEPT) If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: CART OVERRIDE NO? 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG 7 Do you want this user to have cart override rights? If yes: Press 2 (CHG) Press 1 (ACCEPT) If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: USER # * * * * ENTER ACCESS CODE * * * * 8 Enter a four-digit Access Code for the user. Note For simple programming, the Access Code can be the same four-digit number as the User # that you assigned earlier in this procedure. System Response The LCD displays the following message: USER # * * * *, VERIFY CODE * * * *? 1-YES 2-NO 9 Verify that the Access Code is correct, and press 1 (YES). (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 134. 126 Adding a User Programming the Cart From the Cart (Contd) Step Action 10 Do one of the following: If your LCD displays: NARC ACCESS? NONE, 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG Go to the next step. If your LCD displays: ADD NEW USER? 1-YES, 2-NO Either repeat this procedure to add another user or press 2 (No) to complete this procedure. 11 Do you want to give this user access to the eNarc drawer(s)? If yes, press 2 (CHG). Note If your cart has two eNarc drawers, press 2 (CHG) until you display the setting you want, then press 1 (ACCEPT) and go to the next step. System Response The LCD displays the following message: USER # * * * * ENTER NEW NARC CODE * * * * If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). You have completed this procedure. 12 Enter a unique, four-digit Narc Code for this user. System Response The LCD displays the following message: USER # * * * *, VERIFY NARC CODE * * * * 13 Verify that the NARC Code is correct and press 1 (YES). January 2004
  • 135. Programming the Cart From the Cart Modifying User Profiles 127 Modifying User Profiles Introduction This section describes how to modify user access settings, including: Access code settings eNarc access code settings (if applicable) Modifying A Complete the following procedure to modify user access settings. User’s Code Access Settings Step Action 1 Enter Programming Mode. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Entering Programming Mode on page 97. System Response The LCD displays the following message: 1-RECALL EVENTS 2-EDIT PROGRAM 2 Press 2 (EDIT PROGRAM). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT USER ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 3 Press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT CODE ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 4 Press 1 (YES) and enter the user’s four-digit User #. (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 136. 128 Modifying User Profiles Programming the Cart From the Cart (Contd) Step Action 5 Do you want to edit the User Type setting? If yes, press 2 (CHG) and press 1 (ACCEPT). If no press, 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: CART OVERRIDE NO? 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG 6 Do you want to edit the Override setting? If yes, press 2 (CHG) and press 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: USER# XXXX ENTER ACCESS CODE _ _ _ _ 7 Enter a new four-digit Access Code for this user. Note If you enter a code that is already in use, the LCD displays a CODE NOT AVAILABLE message. System Response The LCD displays the following message: USER# XXXX VERIFY CODE 1-YES 2-NO 8 Verify that the code information is correct and press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT CODE ACCESS? 1-YES 2-NO January 2004
  • 137. Programming the Cart From the Cart Modifying User Profiles 129 Modifying a Complete the following procedure to modify eNarc access codes. User’s eNarc Access Code Settings Step Action 1 Enter Programming Mode. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Entering Programming Mode on page 97. System Response The LCD displays the following message: 1-RECALL EVENTS 2-EDIT PROGRAM 2 Press 2 (EDIT PROGRAM). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT USER ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 3 Press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT CODE ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 4 Press 2 (NO). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT NARC ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 5 Press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: ENTER USER # _ _ _ _ 6 Enter the four-digit User # . System Response The LCD displays the following message: NARC ACCESS DWR1 1-ACCEPT 2-CHG (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 138. 130 Modifying User Profiles Programming the Cart From the Cart (Contd) Step Action 7 Do you want to edit this user’s eNarc drawer setting? If yes, press 2 (CHG) until you see the option that you want. Press 1 (ACCEPT). If no, press 1 (ACCEPT). System Response The LCD displays the following message: USER # ENTER NEW NARC CODE 8 Enter a new a four-digit eNarc Narc Access code. System Response The LCD displays the following message: USER # * * * *, VERIFY NARC CODE * * * * 1-YES 2-NO 9 Verify that the code is correct and press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT NARC ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC January 2004
  • 139. Programming the Cart From the Cart Deleting a User 131 Deleting a User Introduction If your cart requires SPECIFIC access codes, you can delete user profiles that you add to the cart. Note The type of configuration (GENERAL or SPECIFIC) that your cart uses is specified in the ACCESS CODE section of your cart settings. For more information, see Modifying Cart Settings on page 103. Procedure Complete the following procedure to delete a user. Step Action 1 Enter Programming Mode. Reference For step-by-step instructions, see Entering Programming Mode on page 97. System Response The LCD displays the following message: 1-RECALL EVENTS 2-EDIT PROGRAM 2 Press 2 (EDIT PROGRAM). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT USER ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 3 Press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT CODE ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 140. 132 Deleting a User Programming the Cart From the Cart (Contd) Step Action 4 Press 2 (NO). System Response The LCD displays the following message: EDIT NARC ACCESS? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 5 Press 2 (NO). System Response The LCD displays the following message: DELETE USER? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC 6 Press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: ENTER USER NUMBER TO DELETE _ _ _ _ 7 Enter the four-digit User #. System Response The LCD displays the following message: DELETE USER XXXX CONFIRM 1-YES 2-NO 8 Verify that the User Number that displays is correct. Press 1 (YES). System Response The LCD displays the following message: DELETE USER? 1-YES, 2-NO, ESC January 2004
  • 141. -133 133 A Event Master List Event Codes This appendix describes the codes that display on the LCD when you use Recall Events mode or on the Cart Host software log file. Event # Cart Text Cart Host Text Comment 1 Invalid Code Invalid Code Invalid access code entered 2 Code Access Code Access Cart opened by access code 3 Key Access Key Access Cart opened with key 4 Manual Manual Cart closed manually Secured Secured 5 Keypad Keypad Cart closed with keypad Secured Secured secure 6 Auto Secured Auto Secured Cart closed after auto- secure timeout 7 Narc Secured Narc Secured Narcotics drawers all closed 8 Power Power Power restored to the Restored Restored cart 9 Narc Access Narc Access Narcotics drawer access allowed 10 Ovrrd Access Override Override access allowed Access (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 142. 134 Event Master List (Contd) Event # Cart Text Cart Host Text Comment 11 3 Bad Codes 3 Bad Codes Three bad access codes were entered 12 NARC Open Secure Drawer Narcotic drawer open Sec Opened when access not allowed. 13 Secure Fault Secure Drawer Lock mechanism in Fault wrong position after securing cart 14 Master Prog Master Master programming Programming mode was entered Allowed 15 Master Recall Master Recall Master event recall mode Allowed was entered 16 User Edit User Edit Personal edit mode was Allowed entered 17 Master Cd Chg Master Code Master access code was Changed changed 18 Mod Access Access Code A users access code Cd Changed was changed 19 Mod User User Access A users access level was Level Level Changed changed (admin/normal) 20 Mod Narc Narc Access A users narcotics access Acces Level Changed level was changed (none, 1, 2 or both) 21 Mod Narc Narc Code A users narcotics access Code Changed code was changed 22 Add User User Added A user was added 23 Delete User User Deleted A user was deleted (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 143. Event Master List 135 (Contd) Event # Cart Text Cart Host Text Comment 24 Mod AutoSec AutoSecure The auto-secure time Dl Delay was changed Changed 25 Mod Prsnl Edit Personal Personal editing was Editing enabled or disabled Changed 26 Modify Time Time Changed The time was changed 27 Modify Date Date Changed The date was changed 28 Modify Alarm Alarm Enable Alarm was enabled or Changed disabled 29 Modify Alm Lvl Alarm Level The alarm level was Changed changed 30 Mod Narc Cd Narc Code Narcotics code was Tp Type Changed changed to specific or general 31 Mod Ovrrd Override Code The override code as Code Changed changed 32 Mod GenNarc General Narc The general narcotics Cd Code Changed code was changed 33 Mod Gen Acc General The general access code Cd Access Code was changed Changed 34 Spr Mastr Alwd Super Master Super master access Access was allowed Allowed 35 Narc1 Acc Narc1 Access Access was allowed to Alwd Allowed narcotics drawer 1 (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 144. 136 Event Master List (Contd) Event # Cart Text Cart Host Text Comment 36 Narc2 Acc Narc2 Access Access was allowed to Alwd Allowed narcotics drawer 2 37 Mod Narc1 Alm Narc1 Alarm Narcotics drawer 1 alarm Changed was enabled or disabled 38 Mod Narc2 Alm Narc2 Alarm Narcotics drawer 2 alarm Changed was enabled or disabled 39 Mod Accs Cd Access Code Access code was Tp Type Changed changed to general or specific 40 Mod Key Beep Key Beep Key beep was enabled Changed or disabled 41 Mod Custom Custom Port Port used for custom Prt Changed input was changed 42 Mod Mtn Motion Detect Motion detect level was Detect Changed changed January 2004
  • 145. -137 137 B Troubleshooting General Tips If the cart does not function properly try the following: Use the red Reset button on the back of the cart to restart the cart. Make sure the charger is connected at the cart and at the wall. If the battery was completely discharged it may take several minutes to recharge enough to operate cart. Use the main key to unlock the cart and call your supervisor for further assistance. You can also use the eNarc override located in the rear service panel. To access this override you must open the back panel by pushing the black release button until it extends, then turn clockwise. The override uses a tubular key and the lock is located in the back divider panel in one of the four holes. Insert the key, turn and hold while opening the eNarc drawer. If the LCD indicates an incorrect code, please see your supervisor for the correct code. If none of these tips remedy the problem, please contact your supervisor or Artromick Technical Support 24/7 at 800-848-6462. Restarting Your Restarting your cart is similar to restarting your PC. Occasionally a procedure Cart requires that you reset the cart. To restart the cart, press the red Reset button on the back of the cart. This red button is located directly above the charger connector. January 2004
  • 146. 138 Troubleshooting January 2004
  • 147. -139 139 C Setup Guides Cart Settings This table describes the settings on the cart. It also describes what the factory default cart setting is, available options for the setting, and whether the setting can be adjusted from the cart’s keypad. The Setting The Factory My Setting Can I Adjust Name is… Default for Options Are… This From This Setting the Keypad? is… Serial No. M(S)1000000 N/A No HW/FW Rev. 1.00/1.02 N/A No Super Master Preset N/A No Cart Name Account Name 20 Characters No Cart Number 1-? 4 Digits No Cart Master 7777 Four digits Yes Cart Override 5555 Four digits Yes User Code Type General General or Yes Specific General Access 1234 Four digits Yes Code eNarc Code General General or Yes Type Specific January 2004
  • 148. 140 Setup Guides (Contd) The Setting The Factory My Setting Can I Adjust Name is… Default for Options Are… This From This Setting the Keypad? is… eNarc General 4321 Four digits Yes Code Auto Secure 5 mins. 1 – 99 mins. Yes Delay Motion Detector 5 Off – 10 Yes Personal Editing No Yes or No Yes Alarm Enable On On or Off Yes eNarc Alarm On On or Off Yes Beeper Level Med Off, low, Med or Yes High Key Beep On On or Off Yes Light Timeout 1 1 – 99 Yes eNarc Number None None, 1, or 2 No Host port Comm 1 Comm 1,2,3, No Printer port Comm 1 Comm 1,2,3, No Custom port None Comm 1,2,3, Yes Time EST 12 Hour Format Yes Date Current Month/Day/ Year Yes (Continued on next page) January 2004
  • 149. Setup Guides 141 Default User At the factory, Artromick programs your cart to include one default user that can Sheet be used with Specific configurations. This enables you to switch between Specific and General configurations without negatively impacting your ability to access the cart. This table describes the default user that Artromick initially programs on the cart for use with Specific configurations. The first two columns (“The Setting Name is…” and “The Factory Default for This Setting is…”) describe the name of the setting and the default value that Artromick programs at the factory, respectively. The second two columns (“My Setting Options Are…” and “Can I Adjust This From the Keypad?”) can be used as a reference if you want to set up additional users after the cart is delivered. The Setting The Factory My Setting Can I Adjust Name is… Default for This Options This From the Setting is… Are… Keypad? User ID 3333 0001 – 9999 Input new only or delete Name (Blank) 10 Characters No Override Off On or Off Yes User Type Administrator Administrator/ Yes Normal Access Code 3333 4 Unique Yes Numbers Narc Access Drawer 1 & 2 None, Drawer Yes 1, 2, 1&2 Narc Code 4444 0000 – 9999 Yes Extended ID (Blank) 16 Characters No January 2004
  • 150. 142 Setup Guides January 2004
  • 151. Avalo AC Medication Cart Host Software Manual Index Symbols setting 24, 26, 104, 105 Auto Secure setting 69 *.crt 39, 58 AutoLock *.log 39 system 24 *.usr 39, 73, 79 timer 4, 26 and cart movement 26 A AutoLock timer AC Systems Support Panel 7, 23, 46 activity 26 access relock process 26 access card 17 using 26 Access Code and Access Card 18 automatic relock, narcotics drawers 28 Access Code only 16 Avalo Cart Host 42 alarms 20 cart 4, 15 B code and access card 18 battery 4 denied 19 charging 22 Host software 42 low 32 Host software cart settings file 66 low power 22 Host software log file 54 recharge time 23 key 19 testing 22 messages 20 Battery button 5 problems 19 BATTERY NEEDS RECHARGED SOON 22 access card 4, 9, 15, 17, 18, 20 BATTERY STATUS UNAVAILABLE 22 denied 19 baud 47 access code 4, 9 Baud Rate 62 incorrect 19 setting 106, 122 beeper level setting 60, 103 Access Code field 74, 75, 76, 86 Bits per Second 47 accessing Host software user file 79 C Active field 85 cart activity monitor 26 access 4, 15 Add Group 82 problems 19 Admin user role 8, 73, 83, 86, 122 access methods 15 alarm 19, 24 access with code only 16 access 20 activity tracking 4 eNarc 28 auto secure 4 setting 60, 104, 105 components 4 Alarm Enable check box 60 controls 4 Alarm/Beeper setting 69 features 4 Allowed drop-down list 59 modifying settings 108 Always Required check box 61 movement 26 audit tracking 99 reading the 80 auto secure secure function 24 function 4 settings 4 January 2004
  • 152. ii Avalo AC Medication Cart Host Software Manual list 69, 103 Custom Port drop-down list 63 modification procedure 108 modifying 103 D writing to the 81 Data Bit 62 Cart Access Reset Button 7 Data Bits 47 Cart Codes setting 69 Date field 51, 52 Cart fields 58 DATE setting 107 Cart Host software 9, 38, 39 definitions Cart Master field 59 cart settings 58, 103 Cart Override field 59 general 9 CART OVERRIDE user access setting 122 Delay field 59 Cart setting 69 Delete User button 94 cart settings deleting Host software modifications 69 Host software user 93 reading from cart 67 deleting users 131 writing 68 Description field 52 Cart Settings file 9 Device Manager 47 cart settings file 39, 58 documentation conventions 3 accessing 66 Alarm/Beeper 69 Auto Secure 69 E Cart 69 Edit User dialog box 90, 91 Cart Codes 69 electronic keyless narcotic storage 4, 5, 28 Com Port Setup 69 eNarc 4, 61 creating 58 alarms 28 Light Timeout 69 drawers, access 123 Narcotics 69 messages 28 Personal Editing 69 modifying settings 129 Time/Date 69 using 28 User Codes 69 eNarc button 5 CartHost 42 ESC button 5 cascade feature 39 Event field 52 Charge Input 7 event recall 4 CHARGE outlet 23 exiting 99 CHG CART MASTER CODE setting 106 link to host 99 Clear button 6 printing 99 Close 63 procedure 100 Close button 52 reviewing 99 Code Type drop-down list 62 Extended ID field 74, 75, 76, 87 Code Type field 51 COM port settings 47 F configuring 47 Function button 5 COM port setup 62 Com Port Setup 47 Com Port Setup setting 69 G communication ports 7 General Code field 61, 62 Communications (COM) Port settings 43 H configuration Host Port drop-down list 62 COM port 47 Host software 9, 38, 39 connector panel 7, 46 access 42 January 2004
  • 153. Avalo AC Medication Cart Host Software Manual deleting users 93 Minutes field 60 installation 40 monitoring 26 log file 51 moving the cart 26 modifying cart settings 69 MTN DETECTOR setting 26, 59, 104, 105 modifying eNarc access 91 HW/FW Rev field 58 N Name field 51, 52, 58, 73, 86 I Narc 1 Alarm check box 60 ID field 52, 73, 85 NARC 1 ALARM setting 104, 105 idle mode 26 Narc 2 Alarm check box 60 installation NARC 2 ALARM setting 104, 105 Host software 40 NARC ACCESS DWR user access setting 74, installation, software 75, 76, 83, 86, 123 requirements 38 Narc Code field 74, 75, 76, 87 Intelligent Power Management System 22 NARC CODE setting 106 narcotic code 10 K narcotics drawers 4, 28 accessing 29 key access 4, 15, 19 automatic re-lock 28 Key Beep check box 60 Narcotics setting 69 KEY BEEP setting 104, 105 night light 4 keypad buttons 5 adjustable timer 32 keypad, securing cart with 24 time interval 32 Keyswitch user role 8 using 32 Normal user role 8, 73, 83, 86, 122 L Num Drawers drop-down list 61 LCD 9 Num field 52 Level drop-down list 60 Number field 58 light auto shut-off 32 O time interval 32 using 32 OK button 83, 87 Light button 5 Override check box 74, 75, 76, 86 LIGHT ON setting 107 override code 4, 10 Light Timeout 60 using 30 Light timeout setting 69 LINK TO HOST OPEN 49 P log file 9, 39 Parity 47, 62 accessing 54 PC fields 59 creating 53 Personal Editing field 52 definition 51 PERSONAL EDITING setting 106 introduction 51 Personal Editing setting 69 updating 54 personal identification number (PIN) 9 pharmacy, restocking 4 M PIN 9 user access code 74, 75, 76, 86, 87, 122 master code 9, 45, 98 Power Output 7 Master Event List 51 power requirements 22 messages Printer Port drop-down list 62 access 20 Program Group 41 eNarc 28 January 2004
  • 154. iv Avalo AC Medication Cart Host Software Manual programming mode 10 Time field 51, 52 entering 97 TIME setting 106 procedure 97 Time/Date setting 69 tracking events 99 R Type drop-down list 61 type styles in this guide 3 Read Cart 10, 39, 52, 58, 63, 64, 67, 73, 78, 80 reading the cart 80 rear panel 7 U recall events user # 10 navigation 99 user access 4 recall events mode 10, 99 access card and code 18 recharge battery 22 access card only 17 Recharger Unit 23 deleting 131 relock time interval 4 key 19 Reset button 4, 7 methods 15 restocking, override code 4 modifying eNarc settings 129 modifying settings 127 S navigating settings 102, 120 night light 32 secure roles 4 manually 25 settings 122 with keypad 24 User Codes setting 69 Secure button 5 user file 10, 39, 78, 80, 84, 88, 89, 91, 93 secure drawers 4 access 79 types of access 123 creating 73 secure function 4 user roles Secure Time field 52 Admin 73, 83, 86, 122 security 4, 19 Normal 73, 83, 86, 122 Serial No. field 58 User Type field 73, 83, 86 settings USER TYPE user access setting 122 auto secure 24 user types, cart 8 cart defined 58, 103 USER# user access setting 122 modifying 103 users, adding 121 complete list 69, 103 Users/Events field 58 definitions 122 modifying cart 108 W modifying eNarc 129 Write Cart 11, 39, 58, 63, 68, 73, 81 modifying user access 127 user access 122 Setup button 62 setup.exe 40 SN field 51 software, Host 9 Stop Bit 62 Stop Bits 47 system requirements 38 T terms, general 9 January 2004